Sunteți pe pagina 1din 1602

KX-T336 SYSTEM

System Reference Manual


Vol. 1

Matsushita Consumer Electronics Company,


Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),


Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
Ave. 65 de Infantería, Km. 9.5, San Gabriel Industrial Park, Carolina,
Puerto Rico 00985

Matsushita Electric of Canada Limited


5770 Ambler Drive, Mississauga, Ontario, L4W2T3

Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.


Central P.O.Box 288, Osaka 530-91, Japan

KX - A220
Printed in Japan PQQX6483WA KW0691O2045

C Kyushu Matsushita Electric Co., Ltd. 1997


Contents

Vol. 1
Section 1 ---- System Outline

Section 2 ---- Installation

Section 3 ---- System Features and Operation

Section 4 ---- Station Features and Operation


Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 5 ---- Station Features and Operation


Single Line Telephone (SLT)

Section 6 ---- Station Features and Operation


Attendant Console (ATT)

Vol. 2
Section 7 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles

Section 8 ---- Preparation for Programming and Maintenance


Dumb Type Terminal

Section 9 ---- System Programming


VT220 and Compatibles

Section 10 ---- System Programming


Dumb Type Terminal

Section 11 ---- System Programming


Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 12 ---- Station Programming


Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)

Section 13 ---- Station Programming


Attendant Console (ATT)

Section 14 ---- Maintenance


VT220 and Compatibles

Section 15 ---- Maintenance


Dumb Type Terminal

Section 16 ---- Backup Utility-On-Site

Section 17 ---- Backup Utility-Remote Location

Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Section 19 ---- Index


NOTIFY THE TELEPHONE COMPANY For U.S.A. Only
Installation must be performed by the telephone company or a qualified professional installer.

Notify the Telephone Company


Before connecting this equipment to any telephone, call the telephone company and inform them of the
following:

• Telephone number to which the system will be connected ..................................................


• Make....................................................................................................................Panasonic
• Model..........................................................................................KX-T336100/KX-T336200

• FCC Registration No.......................See the Name Plate on the KX-T336100/KX-T336200


In case of enabling the following function(s), please inform your telephone company
of the FCC Registration number “ACJJPN-18958-MF-E.”

1. Ground Start
2. Automatic Route Selection
3. Local Access

If these features are not being used, use “ACJJPN-18959-KF-E.”

• Ringer Equivalence.......................................................................................................0.4B
• Service Order Code ......................................................................................................9.0F
• Facility Interface Code (Loop Start).......................................................................02LS2
(Ground Start) ..................................................................02GS2
(DID)..............................................................................02RV2-T
(OPX)................................................................................0L13C
• Required Network Interface Jack (Loop Start and Ground Start).............................RJ21X
(DID and OPX).......................................................RJ11

Present FCC Regulation prohibit connecting this unit to a party line, or to a coin operated telephone.

Please read the section on “Telephone Company and FCC Requirements and Responsibilities.”

1
TELEPHONE COMPANY and
FCC REQUIREMENTS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
In compliance with the requirements of Part 68 of (a) Promptly notify the customer of such
the FCC Rules and Regulations for connection of temporary discontinuance of service.
terminal system (this device is classified as (b) Afford the customer the opportunity to correct
terminal system) to the telephone network and the situation which gave rise to the temporary
for your convenience, the following information is discontinuance.
presented: (c) Inform the customer of the right to bring a
complaint to the Commission pursuant to the
1. Notification to the Telephone procedures set out in Subpart E of Part 68 of
FCC Telephone Equipment Rules.
Company
Customers connecting terminal equipment to the
4. Compatibility of The
telephone network shall, upon request of the Telephone Network and
Telephone Company, inform the Telephone Terminal Equipment
Company of the particular line(s) to which such
connection is made, the FCC registration number
and (See label on bottom of unit.) ringer (a) Availability of telephone
equivalence number of the registered terminal interface information.
equipment.
The REN is useful to determine the quantity of Technical information concerning interface
devices you may connect to your telephone line parameters and specifications not specified in
and still have all of those devices ring when your FCC Rules, including the number of Ringers
telephone number is called. In most, but not all which may be connected to a particular
areas, the sum of the REN's of all devices telephone line, which is needed to permit
connected to one line should not exceed five Terminal Equipment to operate in a manner
(5.0). To be certain of the number of devices you compatible with Telephone Company
may connect to your line, as determined by the communications facilities, shall be provided by
REN, your should contact your local telephone the Telephone Company upon customer's
company to determine the maximum REN for request.
your calling area.
(b)Changes in Telephone
2. Direct connection to A Party-
Company Communications
line or Coin-operated
Facilities, Equipment,
telephone Line is Prohibited
Operations and Procedures.
3. Incidence of Harm to The The Telephone Company may make changes in
Telephone Lines its communications facilities, equipment,
operations or procedures, where such action is
Should Terminal Equipment cause harm to the reasonably required in the operation of its
Telephone Network, the Telephone Company business and is not inconsistent with the rules
shall, where practical, notify the customer that and regulations in FCC Part 68 of the FCC Rules
temporary discontinuance of service may be and Regulations. If such changes can be
required. However, where prior notice is not reasonably expected to render any customer
practical, the Telephone Company may Terminal Equipment incompatible with Telephone
temporarily discontinue service forthwith, if such Company Communications Facilities, or require
action is reasonable in the circumstances. In modification or alteration of such Terminal
case of such unnotified temporary Equipment, or otherwise materially affect its use
discontinuance of service, the Telephone or performance, the customer shall be given
Company shall: adequate notice in writing, to allow the customer
an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service.

2
OTHERS
WARNING:
For U.S.A. only
TO PREVENT FIRE OR SHOCK HAZARD, DO NOTE: This equipment has been tested and
NOT EXPOSE THIS PRODUCT TO RAIN OR found to comply with the limits for a Class A
MOISTURE. digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. These limits are designed to provide
• Keep the unit away from heating appliances reasonable protection against harmful
and electrical noise generating devices such as interference when the equipment is operated
fluorescent lamps, motors and television. in a commercial environment.
These noise sources can interfere with the
performance of the EASA-PHONE. This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
• This unit should be kept free of dust, moisture, installed and used in accordance with the
high temperature and vibration, and should not instruction manual, may cause harmful
be exposed to direct sunlight. interference to radio communications.
• Never attempt to insert wires, pins, etc. into Operation of this equipment in a residential
the vents or other holes of this unit. area is likely to cause harmful interference in
which case the user will be required to
• If there is trouble, disconnect the unit from the correct the interference at his own expense.
telephone line. Plug the telephone directly into
the telephone line. If the telephone operates
properly, do not reconnect the unit to the line
until the trouble has been repaired by an
authorized Panasonic Factory Service Center.
If the telephone does not operate properly,
chances are that the trouble is in the telephone
system, and not in the unit.
• Do not use benzine, thinner, or similar solvents.
Do not use abrasive powder to clean the
cabinet. Wipe it with a soft cloth.

The serial number of this product may be found on the label affixed to the bottom of the unit.
You should note the serial number of this unit in the space provided and retain this book as a
permanent record of your purchase to aid in identification in the even of theft.

MODEL NO.: KX-T336100/KX-T336200

SERIAL NO.:

For your future reference

DATE OF PURCHASE

NAME OF DEALER

DEALER'S ADDRESS

3
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
When using your telephone equipment, 8. This product is equipped with a three wire
basic safety precautions should always grounding type plug, a plug having a third
(grounding) pin. This plug will only fit into a
be followed to reduce the risk of fire, grounding type power outlet. This is a safety
electric shock and injury to persons, feature. If you are unable to insert the plug
including the following: into the outlet, contact your electrician to
replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat
1 . Read and understand all instructions. the safety purpose of the grounding type
plug.
2. Follow all warnings and instructions marked
on the product. 9. Do not allow anything to rest on the power
cord. Do not locate this product where the
3. Unplug this product from the wall outlet cord will be abused by persons walking on it.
before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners
or aerosol cleaners. Use a damp cloth for 10. Do not overload wall outlets and extension
cleaning. cords as this can result in the risk of fire or
electric shock.
4. Do not use this product near water, for
example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen 11. Never push objects of any kind into this
sink, or laundry tub, in a wet basement, or product through cabinet slots as they may
near a swimming pool. touch dangerous voltage points or short out
parts that could result in a risk of fire or
5. Do not place this product on an unstable cart, electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
stand, or table. The product may fall, on the product.
causing serious damage to the product.
12. To reduce the risk of electric shock, do not
6. Slots and openings in the cabinet and the disassemble this product, but take it to a
back or bottom are provided for ventilation, to qualified serviceman when some service or
protect it from overheating, these openings repair work is required. Opening or removing
must not be blocked or covered. The covers may expose you to dangerous
openings should never be blocked by placing voltages or other risks. Incorrect reassembly
the product on the bed, sofa, rug, or other can cause electric shock when the appliance
similar surface. This product should never be is subsequently used.
placed near or over a radiator or heat
register. This product should not be placed in
a built-in installation unless proper ventilation
is provided.

7. This product should be operated only from


the type of power source indicated on the
marking label. If you are not sure of the type
of power supply to your home, consult your
dealer or local power company.

4
13. Unplug this product from the wall outlet and 14. Avoid using a telephone (other than a
refer servicing to qualified service personnel cordless type) during an electrical storm.
under the following conditions: There may be a remote risk of electric shock
from lightning.
A. When the power supply cord or plug is
damaged or frayed. 15. Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak
B. If liquid has been spilled into the product. in the vicinity of the leak.
C. If the product has been exposed to rain or
water.
D. If the product does not operate normally
by following the operating instructions. SAVE THESE
Adjust only those controls, that are
covered by the operating instructions INSTRUCTIONS
because improper adjustment of other
controls may result in damage and will
often require extensive work by a qualified
technician to restore the product to normal
operation.
E. If the product has been dropped or the
cabinet has been damaged.
F. If the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance.

SAFETY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS


When installing telephone wiring, basic
safety precautions should always be
followed to reduce the risk of fire, electric
shock and injury to persons, including
the following;

1. Never install telephone wiring during a


lightning storm.

2. Never install telephone jacks in wet locations


unless the jack is specifically designed for
wet locations.

3. Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or


terminals unless the telephone line has been
disconnected at the network interface.

4. Use caution when installing or modifying


telephone lines.

5
Section 1

System Outline
(Section 1)

System Outline

Contents

Page
A Overview.......................................................................................................... 1-A-1

1.00 The Structure of This Manual ................................................................ 1-A-1


2.00 Some Conventions Used in This Manual............................................... 1-A-2
3.00 System Description................................................................................ 1-A-3
4.00 Communication Needs .......................................................................... 1-A-3
5.00 Service Cards Description..................................................................... 1-A-5

B System Components........................................................................................ 1-B-1

1.00 Components List.................................................................................... 1-B-1


2.00 System Connections.............................................................................. 1-B-2

C Features........................................................................................................... 1-C-1

D Administration.................................................................................................. 1-D-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 1-D-1


2.00 System Interface.................................................................................... 1-D-1
3.00 Programming......................................................................................... 1-D-2
4.00 Test........................................................................................................ 1-D-2
5.00 Monitor................................................................................................... 1-D-3
6.00 Backup Utility......................................................................................... 1-D-3

E System Configuration....................................................................................... 1-E-1

1.00 Basic Shelf............................................................................................. 1-E-1


2.00 Expansion Shelf..................................................................................... 1-E-2
3.00 Attendant Console................................................................................. 1-E-3
4.00 CPU Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-3
5.00 TSW Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-4
6.00 Power Unit............................................................................................. 1-E-4
7.00 LCOT Card ............................................................................................ 1-E-5
8.00 RCOT Card............................................................................................ 1-E-5
9.00 PCOT Card............................................................................................ 1-E-6
10.00 GCOT Card (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only) ........................................ 1-E-6
11.00 PLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.00 SLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.01 SLC Card..................................................................................... 1-E-7
12.02 SLC-M Card................................................................................. 1-E-7
13.00 HLC Card............................................................................................... 1-E-8
14.00 ATLC Card............................................................................................. 1-E-8
15.00 DISA Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-9
16.00 DID Card................................................................................................ 1-E-10
17.00 OPX Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-10

1-1
Page
18.00 DPH Card .............................................................................................. 1-E-10
19.00 AGC Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-11
20.00 RMT Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-11
21.00 T-SW Conference Expansion Card........................................................ 1-E-12
22.00 OHCA Card............................................................................................ 1-E-12
23.00 T-SW OHCA Expansion Card................................................................ 1-E-12
24.00 OPX Power Unit..................................................................................... 1-E-12
25.00 E&M Card.............................................................................................. 1-E-13
26.00 T-1 Digital Trunk Card............................................................................ 1-E-13
27.00 E-1 Digital Trunk Card ........................................................................... 1-E-14

1-2
A. Overview

1.00 The Structure of This Manual


Introduction Section 9 System Programming (VT220 and
This system reference manual provides general Compatibles)
technical information on Panasonic KX-T336 This section provides information for the
system. programming of the system database using VT220
This includes a description of the system, its and Compatibles.
hardware and software, features and service,
Section 10 System Programming (Dumb)
environmental requirements.
This section provides information for the
This manual is intended to serve as an overall
programming of the system database using Dumb
technical reference for the system.
terminal.
Organization
Section 11 System Programming (PITS)
This manual is comprised of the following 19
This section provides information for a certain
sections.
programming of the system database using PITS
Section 1 System Outline telephone.
This section describes the overall information of
Section 12 Station Programming (PITS)
the system and the construction of this Service
This section provides information for the
Reference Manual.
programming of various features specific to each
Section 2 Installation PITS telephone and DSS console using PITS
This section describes how to install and start up telephone.
the system.
Section 13 Station Programming (ATT)
Section 3 System Features and Operation This section provides information for the
This section describes the basic system features. programming and the back-up of the attendant
console database using the attendant console.
Section 4 Station Features and Operation
(PITS) Section 14 Maintenance (VT220 and
This section describes the basic features and Compatibles)
operations from the viewpoint of Proprietary This section describes the information necessary
Integrated Telephone System (PITS) users. for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
The basic features and required operations for using VT220 and Compatibles.
DSS console are also described.
Section 15 Maintenance (Dumb)
Section 5 Station Feature and Operation (SLT) This section describes the information necessary
This section describes the basic features and for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the system
operations from the viewpoint of Single Line using Dumb terminal.
Telephone (SLT) users.
Section 16 Backup Utility-On-Site
Section 6 Station Feature and Operation (ATT) This section provides the information for saving
This section describes the basic features and and loading of the system programming data
operations from the viewpoint of the Attendant (including attendant console database) at on-site.
Console (ATT) Operator.
Section 17 Backup Utility-Remote Location
Section 7 Preparation for Programming and This section provides the information for saving
Operation (VT220 and Compatibles) and loading the system programming data
This section describes the basic usage and (including attendant console database) from a
available functions of VT220 and Compatibles. remote location.
Section 8 Preparation for Programming and Section 18 Abbreviations
Operation (Dumb) This section provides a list of abbreviations used
This section describes the basic usage and in this manual.
command reference of Dumb terminal.
Section 19 Index

1-A-1
2.00 Some Conventions Used in
This Manual
In this manual “system features” are described in <3> shows the reference number for
Section 3 and “station (PITS, SLT, ATT) features” programming (Dumb terminal user)
are described in Section 4 to Section 6. In these
sections, information for each feature is (Note)
presented under the following four headings: In this manual, all reference numbers are
described using Section Number, Subsection
Description, Programming, Conditions, and
Number, and Title Number.
Operation.
<Example>
Description
2.00 System Administration from
Defines the feature, describes what it does for a Remote Location
the user, and how it is used.
Description
Programming
From a remote location, you can perform system
Provides tabular listing of items required for programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements
system programming as follows: using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters, refer
<1> <2> <3> to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Interface.”
Reference
System Programming Conditions
VT Dumb
• RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 system and assign the telephone number of
Executive Busy Override
Deny
“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.04 10-C-10.00
Busy Override Deny Set 7.00 Communication Interface
Busy Override Deny Cancel

Title Number
Interpret this table as follows:
<1> shows the required programming items for
the described feature.
<2> shows the reference number for
programming (VT 220 user)
For example, interpret “9-D-4.01” as follows.
9-D-4.01 Conditions
Title Number
Describes the applications and benefits of the
Subsection Number
feature, followed by factors to be considered
Section Number
when the feature is used.
<Example>
4.00 Class of Service Operation
4.01 Class of Service (1/2)
Provides instructions for a user of PITS
telephone (Section 4), Single Line Telephone
Title Number
(Section 5) and Attendant Console (Section 6)
individually.

1-A-2
3.00 System Description 4.00 Communications Needs
The system can consist of one, two, or three To meet the user’s communications needs, this
shelves (Basic and Expansion 1, 2) and system provides the following features.
Attendant Console. Each shelf contains its own
power supply. Outgoing Call Features
Basic shelf is always required and it can be
Toll Restrictions allow the manager to restrict
equipped with up to 96 lines (including
extension users from making certain types of
Extensions and CO lines).
calls.
Restriction is administered through outward
Building Block System
restriction, toll restriction, and ARS restriction.
Useful to enlarge system's ability by installing the
optional Expansion Shelf. Automatic Route Selection (ARS) provides for
Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to the routing of calls over the telecommunication
the system. network based on preferred routes (normally the
Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to least expensive route available at the time the
120 lines (including Extensions and CO lines). call is made) with capacity for multiple common
carriers. (for U.S.A., Canada and New Zealand)
Flexible Ports
Receiving Features
Up to 336 lines (including Extensions and CO
lines) can be connected with this system. Direct Inward Dialing (DID) allows outside parties
However Extensions (including DSS to reach specific inside parties or facilities by
consoles)must be 288 lines or less and CO lines direct dialing without attendant assistance.
must be 144 lines or less.
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) allows the
Up to two Attendant Consoles (option-with CRT outside parties to dial directly into this system
display) can be connected to the system if ATLC and access to certain system’s features and
card is equipped with this system. facilities without attendant assistance.
Attendant Console can be used for call After gaining access to the system, the outside
processing and system programming in party can access certain system's features by
interactive format. dialing the appropriate feature number.
Switched Loop Attendant Console Operation
makes the handling of incoming calls more Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) allows incoming
efficient than conventional system. calls to be distributed uniformly to a specific
group of extensions. Calls to a UCD group hunt
Starting up the System Administration and for an idle extension in a circular way, starting at
Maintenance of this system can be done using the extension following the last one called.
VT220 (VT100), Compatibles, Dumb terminal or
Attendant Console. Intercept Routing-No Answer allows calls that are
not answered within a specified time set period to
Not only Panasonic Proprietary Integrated be redirected to an individual covering extension
Telephones (PITS) but Single Line Telephones and/or an attendant console.
(SLT) can be used as Extension Telephones in
this system. Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of
incoming calls to pre-assigned extension of a
hunting group in a circular way or one way when
the called party is busy.

1-A-3
Holding Features Conversation Features
Hold allows an extension user to suspend a call. Conference allows up to 3 parties (maximum two
This feature allows users to temporarily outside parties), including the originator, to join a
disconnect from one conversation and either call.
make or answer another call. Music on-hold or
message may be provided to the held party if Paging Features
available.
Paging allows extension users to make
announcement through built-in speaker of
Call Park allows a user to place a call on hold,
Proprietary Integrated Telephone (PITS) and/or
then pick up the call at any station in the system.
external Pager Equipments.
The user can page another party to pick up the
parked call or may move to another location and
Other Features
then re-access the call.
Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Transferring Features generates detailed call information on all CO
calls and sends this information to the printer.
Transfer allows a user to transfer any call to
SMDR also generates detailed data on Error Log
another party.
Records, System Programming Data and Traffic
This feature supports transfer of calls from the
Information.
called party to another party for completion of a
transaction.
Off Premise Extension (OPX) allows Single Line
Telephones (SLT) installed off the premises can
Call Forwarding allows users who are away from
be operated via a public or private network in
their phones to receive calls at another phone.
exactly the same way as extension on the
This feature supports roving personnel and
premise.
shared office space or company staff.
Account Code Entry allows a user to associate
calls with an account code for charge-back
purposes.

No. Item Maximum number per system/


station
1 Tenant 2 system
2 Operator 2 tenant
3 Speed Dialing-System 200 system
4 Speed Dialing-Station/SLT 10 station
5 One Touch Dialing-Station/PITS 23 station
6 Call Park Area 20 system
7 Programmable Absent Message 10 system
8 Trunk Group 16 system
9 Equal Access Group 4 system
10 OCC Access Group 4 system
11 Toll Restriction Level 16 system
12 Paging Group 8 system
13 ICM Group 8 system
14 Pickup Group 32 system
15 UCD Group 32 system
16 Class of Service 32 system
17 Primary DN (PDN) 3 station
18 Message Waiting 500 system

1-A-4
5.00 Service Cards Description
Extension cards
Proprietary Integrated Line Circuit (PLC) Card; LCOT Card with Polarity Reversal Detection
This card interfaces 8 PITS telephones/DSS (RCOT);
consoles and the TDM bus. This card is a version of the LCOT card with the
It is available to connect 8 PITS telephones, DSS capability to detect a reversal of CO line polarity.
consoles to the system per PLC card. This is useful for determining the start and
completion of calls.
Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card;
This card interfaces 8 SLT type telephones and Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card; *
the TDM bus. This card interfaces 8 central office trunks and the
It is available to connect 8 SLT telephones to the TDM bus. It is available to connect 8 CO lines to
system per SLC card. the system per GCOT card.
A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which
SLC Card with Message Waiting (MSLC); one side of the two wire trunk (typically the “Ring”
This card is the same as the standard SLC card conductor of the Tip and Ring) is momentarily
except that it has the capability to turn on and off grounded to get dial tone.
the message waiting lamp of a Single Line (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
Telephone.
* There are two types of switched trunks one can
Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card; typically lease from a local phone company-
This card interfaces PITS/SLT type telephones, Loop Start and Ground Start.
DSS consoles and the TDM bus. You must be careful to order the correct type of
It is available to connect 8 PITS/SLT telephones/ trunk from your local phone company and
DSS consoles to the system per HLC card. correctly install your telephone system at your
end — so that they both match.
Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card;
This card interfaces 4 off premise extensions Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card;
through off premise extension power unit. This card interfaces 4 central office trunks
arranged for Direct Inward Dialing (DID) and the
Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card; TDM bus.
This card interfaces 2 Attendant Consoles and
the TDM bus. E&M Card;
It is available to connect 2 attendant consoles to This card interfaces 4 E&M lines and TDM bus. It
the system if this card is installed. is available to connect 4 E&M lines to the system
per E&M card.
CO trunk cards
T-1 Digital Trunk Card;
Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT) Card; *
This card interfaces 1 T-1 line and TDM bus. It is
This card interfaces 8 central office loop start
available to connect a T-1 line to the system per
trunks and the TDM bus.
T-1 digital trunk card. A T-1 line has capacity of 24
It is available to connect 8 CO lines to the system
voice conversations.
per LCOT card.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
E-1 Digital Trunk Card;
through a resistance the tip and ring (both wires)
This card interfaces 1 E-1 line (PCM 30) and TDM
of your telephone line.
bus. It is available to connect an E-1 line to the
system per E-1 digital trunk card. An E-1 line has
LCOT Card with Pay-Tone Detection (PCOT);
capacity of 30 voice conversations.
This card is a version of the LCOT card with the
capability to detect a pay-tone of CO line. This is
useful to charge management with a pay-tone
which is sent from CO line

1-A-5
Resource cards Other cards
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card; Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card;
This card interfaces 4 central office trunks This card interfaces 4 doorphones and the TDM
arranged for Direct Inward System Access bus. Up to 4 doorphones can be connected to
(DISA) and the TDM bus. the system.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Card; Time Switch Conference Expansion Card (T-SW
This card is used to maintain volume of CO-CO Conference) Card;
communication. This card provides 64 additional conference
An electronic circuit which compares the level of trunks, and is installed on the T-SW card.
an incoming signal with a previously defined
standard and automatically amplifies or Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card;
attenuates that signal so it arrives at its This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
destination at the correct level. features, and is installed on the HLC card or PLC
card.
Remote Circuit (RMT) Card;
This card is necessary for accessing the system Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement
from a remote location. Expansion (T-.SW OHCA) Card;
This card is for Off Hook Call Announcement
features, and is installed in the Basic Slot 2.

System Configuration

No. Item Maximum number per system/


station
1 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 42 cards (336 ports) system*
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
2 DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT 18 cards (144 ports) system*
3 DPH 1 card (4 doorphones) system*
4 DISA 4 cards (16 resources) system*
5 AGC 4 cards (16 resources) system*
6 RMT 1 card (1 resource) system*
7 ATLC 1 card (2 ports) system*
8 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 12 cards (96 ports) basic shelf
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
9 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX+DID+LCOT/GCOT+T-1+ 15 cards (120 ports) expansion shelf
E-1+E&M+PCOT+RCOT
10 HLC+PLC+SLC+OPX 12 cards (96 ports) shelf
11 DSS console 16 consoles (16 ports) system*
12 External Pager 2 system*
13 External Music Source 2 system*

* System = fully expanded system = basic shelf + expansion shelf 1 + expansion shelf 2

Note:
Total 18 CO cards (144 ports) allowed per system
DID + LCOT + GCOT + T-1 + E-1 + E&M + PCOT + RCOT
*T-1 is counted as 3 cards, and E-1 is counted as 4 cards.

1-A-6
B. System Components

1.00 Components List

Model No. Name

KX-T336100 Basic Shelf


KX-T336101 CPU card
KX-T336102 T-SW card
KX-T336200 Expansion Shelf
KX-T96300 Attendant Console
KX-T96145 Attendant Console Keyboard
KX-T96186 Off Premise Extension (OPX) Power Unit
KX-T96180 Loop Start Central Office Trunk (LCOT) Card
KX-T96189 Loop Start Central Office Trunk Card with Pay - Tone Detection (PCOT) Card
KX-T96183 Loop Start Central Office Trunk Card with Polarity Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card
KX-T96181 Ground Start Central Office Trunk (GCOT) Card
KX-T96172 Proprietary ITS Line Circuit (PLC) Card
KX-T96174 Single Line Telephone Line Circuit (SLC) Card
KX-T96175 Single Line Telephone Circuit (SLC) Card with Message Waiting
KX-T96170 Hybrid Line Circuit (HLC) Card
KX-T96141 Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Card
KX-T96191 Direct Inward System Access (DISA) Card
KX-T96182 Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96182D Both-way Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96182CE MFC Direct Inward Dialing Trunk (DID) Card
KX-T96185 Off Premise Extension Trunk (OPX) Card
KX-T96161 Doorphone Circuit (DPH) Card
KX-T96193 Automatic Gain Control(AGC) Card
KX-T96196 Remote Circuit (RMT) Card
KX-T336104 Time Switch Conference (T-SW Conference) Expansion Card
KX-T96136 Off Hook Call Announcement (OHCA) Card
KX-T336105 Time Switch Off Hook Call Announcement (T-SW OHCA) Card
KX-T96184 E&M Card
KX-T96187 T-1 Digital Trunk Card
KX-T96188 E-1 Digital Trunk Card

1-B-1
Model No. Name

KX-T30820 Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)


KX-T30830 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (3 CO’s, 8 DSS’s)
KX-T30850 Proprietary Telephone (3 CO’s)
KX-T61620 Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
KX-T61630 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (6 CO’s)
KX-T61650 Proprietary Telephone (6 CO’s)
KX-T123220 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T123230 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123230D Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123235 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T123250 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7020 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7030 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T7050 Proprietary Telephone (12 CO’s)
KX-T7052 Single Line Telephone with FLASH button
KX-T7130 Proprietary Telephone with LCD (12 CO’s)
KX-T61640 DSS Console (16 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T123240 DSS Console (32 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T7040 DSS Console (32 DSS's, 16 PF buttons)
KX-T30865 Doorphone
KX-T30890 Headset
KX-A26D Battery Adapter

1-B-1-1
(70695)
2.00 System Connections
Paging Speaker 1
Amplifier

Paging Speaker 2
Amplifier

Radio

Printer

Radio

To AC Outlet

Data Terminal Automobile type batteries


• Consisting of two 12VDC (24VDC)

1-B-2
(60395)
Central Office Lines

Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

KX-T336 System Attendant Console Attendant Console


KX-T96300 KX-T96300

Off Premise Extension Power Unit


KX-T96186
(two pair) (two pair)
(one pair)

KX-T61640

KX-T61630
Single Line KX-T30830
(two pair) (two pair)
Telephone
(one pair)
KX-T123240

KX-T30820 KX-T61620
(two pair)
(two pair)
Data Terminal
KX-T7040
(three pair)
(one pair)

KX-T30850
(three pair) KX-T61650

(two pair) KX-T123235,


KX-T123230D
Cordless Phone (two pair)

KX-T7130
(two pair)
KX-T123250
(one pair)
(two pair) KX-T123230
Telephone with
Answering (two pair)
Machine
KX-T7030
(two pair)

KX-T7020
(one pair) KX-T123220
Telephone • Parallel connections of extension is
Answering System available. Refer to Section 3-F-9.00
KX-T7050 “Parallel Connection of Extensions”
with Facsimile
for further information.
1-B-3
DID

KX-T96182

CO DID LINE Telephone with Telephone


Single Line Cordless Answering Answering System
Telephone Data Terminal
Phone Machine with Facsimile
LCOT HLC

CO LINE
KX-T96180 KX-T96170

C.O.
CO LINE KX-T7130 KX-T123220 KX-T30850 KX-T61630

GCOT
CO OPX LINE
KX-T96181

KX-T7030 KX-T61650 KX-T123250 KX-T61620 KX-T123235,


KX-T123230D

OPX PLC

KX-T96185 KX-T96172

KX-T123230 KX-T7050 KX-T30820 KX-T30830 KX-T7020

OPX PWR
UNIT
SLC

KX-T96186 DISA
KX-T96174
KX-T96191

STORE HOUSE
Single Line Telephone with Telephone
RMT Cordless
Telephone Data Terminal Answering Answering System
Phone Machine with Facsimile
KX-T96196

AGC

KX-T96193
DPH
Doorphone 1 Doorphone 2 Doorphone 3 Doorphone 4

KX-T96161

Attendant Console Attendant Console


POWER ATLC KX-T96300
BATT KX-T96300
24V A 26D
UNIT
KX-T96141

TSW-OHCA

KX-T336105
Printer
TSW-CONF
RS-232C Amplifier
Paging Speaker 1
KX-T336104

Amplifier
Paging Speaker 2
RS-232C

Data Terminal

Radio Radio
1-B-4
C. Features
Tabular listings of features by group (System, Stations) are provided in this subsection.
System Features are programmed at system level and affect the entire operation of the
system.

Basic Features Flexible Numbering


Directory Number (DN)
Floating Directory Number (FDN)
Tenant Service
Operator
Class of Service (COS)
Group - Intercom
- Pickup
- UCD
- Paging
- Trunk
Night Service - Directed Night Answer
- Universal Night Answer (UNA)
- Flexible Night Service
- Fixed Night Service - Switching of Day/Night Mode
Mixed Station Capacities
Variable Time-Out
Lockout
Automatic Station Release
Distinctive Dial Tone
Distinctive Busy Tone
Confirmation Tone
Tone and Ringing Patterns
Outgoing Call Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access
Features Toll Restriction in ARS System
Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access
Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
Operator/International Call Restriction
7/10 Digit Toll Restriction
Toll Restriction for Speed Dialing
Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
Tone/Pulse Conversion
Automatic Pause Insertion
Receiving Features Dual Console Operation
Attendant Consoles-less Operation
Direct In Line (DIL)
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS) - Day Service
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) - without OGM
- with OGM
Private CO
Single CO
Group CO
Flexible Ringing Assignment - No Ringing
- Delayed Ringing
Discriminating Ringing
Station Hunting - Circular
- Terminal

Continued
1-C-1
Continued
Holding Features Music on Hold
Held Call Reminder
Transfer Recall
Other Features Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
Off Premise Extension (OPX)
Walking Station
Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back
Intercept Routing - No Answer
Rerouting
Calling Party Control (CPC) Detection
CO Busy Out
Parallel Connection of Extensions
Voice Mail Integration
DTMF Tone Integration

1-C-2
Station Features are accessible by an extension user or attendant, either through dial
feature number at a Single Line Telephone, or by either feature number or dedicated
feature button access at a Proprietry Integrated Telephone (PITS) or Attendant Console
location.

Features PITS SLT ATT

Outgoing Call Line Selection-Calling


Features Prime Line Preference
Idle Line Preference
No Line Preference
Local Trunk Dial Access
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
Direct Trunk Access
Inter Office Calling
Intercom Calling
Intercom - Voice Calling
Intercom - Busy Station Signaling
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Automatic Callback Busy - Trunk
- Station
Executive Busy Override
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override
Walking COS (Class of Service)
Operator Call
On-Hook Dialing
Speed Dialing - System
Speed Dialing - Station
One Touch Dialing
Last Number Redial (LNR)
Saved Number Redial (SNR)
Automatic Redial
Pickup Dialing
Serial Call
Receiving Features Line Selection - Answering
Direct Answering
Ringing Line Preference
Prime Line Preference
Call Waiting
Executive Busy Override Deny
Do Not Disturb (DND)
Intercom Answer - Voice Calling Deny
- BSS/OHCA Deny
No Line Preference
Dial Call Pickup
Directed Call Pickup
Call Pickup Deny
Hands-Free Answerback
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Log Out
Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
- Day Service

Continued
1-C-3
Continued

Features PITS SLT ATT

Holding Features Hold


Exclusive Hold
Consultation Hold
Call Park- System
- Station
Call Hold Retrieve - Station
Call Splitting
Transferring Unscreened Call Transfer to Station
Features Screened Call Transfer to Station
Screened Call Transfer to Trunk
Ringing Transfer
Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote
Call Forwarding- All Calls
- Busy/Off-Hook
- No Answer
- Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer
- to Trunk
Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station
Camp-on to Station
Interposition Call/Transfer
Call Transfer via Attendant Console
Released Link Operation
Conversation Programmable Privacy
Features Privacy Release
Privacy Attach
Hands-Free Operation
Conference
Unattended Conference
Doorphone
Flash
External Feature Access
Microphone Mute
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA)
Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling)
Paging Features Paging All Extensions
Group Paging
Paging External Pagers
Paging All Extensions and External Pagers
Call Park and Paging
Background Music (BGM) through External
Pager

Continued

1-C-4
Continued

Features PITS SLT ATT

Other Features Universal Night Answer


Night Service - Manual Change
Flexible Night Service
Account Code Entry
Timed Reminder
Background Music (BGM)
Secret Dialing
Assigned Feature Clear
Electronic Station Lock Out
Remote Station Feature Control
Absent Message Capability
Message Waiting
Data Line Security
DSS Console features
- Automatic Transfer
Dial Tone Transfer
CO Access Control
Search by Name/Department
OGM Recording and Playing Back
Power Failure Operation
Trunk Verify

1-C-5
D. Administration

1.00 Introduction 2.00 System Interface


Starting up the system administration can be The programming and diagnostics features can
done using one of the following devices. be accessed either locally or remotely using the
system RS-232C interface.
• VT220 (VT100)(default setting), Compatibles The system may be configured for local direct
• Dumb Terminal access from the data terminal, or via a modem
• Attendant Console connection that allows the data terminal to be
located at a greater distance from the system
Only one terminal can perform system than is allowed for an RS-232C interface.
administration at any one time. For remote access, a data terminal and modem
Starting up the system administration from a are required at the maintenance location, and
remote location is available. For details about the RMT card (Modem) at the system.
Remote Operation, refer to Section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Location.” Two RS-232C interfaces are provided by the
system.
System Configurations These connections provide communication either
A. VT220 and Dumb terminal locally or remotely between the system and
devices for programming and diagnostics,
external system programming data storage and
Main Unit
VT220, Station Message Detailed Recording (SMDR).
compatibles, SIO #2 is used for SMDR only. SIO #1 is for
or Dumb programming and diagnostics, and external
Terminal.
system programming data storage functions.
Typical devices would include VT220,
#1 compatibles, personal computers and line
RC-232C Cable
#2 printers.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for further information.
B. Attendant console

Attendant
console #1 Extension Main Unit
A
T
Attendant
L
console #2 Extension C

C. Remote operation

Main Unit Remote Terminal

Modem
Central
Office

1-D-1
3.00 Programming 4.00 Test
Before starting up the basic system data System’s built-in maintenance capabilities and
programming, general feature description must the basic diagnostics in fault diagnosis and
be read. corrective maintenance are described in Section
For further information about general feature 14 “Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and
description, refer to Section 3 “System Features Section 15 “Maintenance (Dumb).”
and Operation.”
Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)
Basic system data programming can be done System’s built-in on-line diagnostic test program
using VT220, compatibles, dumb terminal and monitors the troubles generated by hardware or
attendant console. software during on-line communication mode.

(VT220 and Compatibles user) (VT220 and Compatibles user)


Refer to Section 7 “Preparation for Programming Refer to Section 14-D “Self-Test (System-
and Maintenance (VT220 and Compatibles)” and Detected Troubles)” for further information.
Section 9 “System Programming (VT220 and
Compatibles).” (Dumb terminal user)
Refer to Section 15-D “Self-Test (System-
(Dumb terminal user) Detected Troubles)” for further information.
Refer to Section 8 “Preparation for Programming
and Maintenance (Dumb)” and Section 10 Functional test by entering commands
“System Programming (Dumb).” Functional test is done by entering specific test
commands when you install the new device and
so on.

(VT220 and Compatibles user)


Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by
Entering Commands” for further information.

(Dumb terminal user)


Refer to Section 15-E “Functional Test by
Entering Commands” for further information.

1-D-2
5.00 Monitor 6.00 Backup Utility
Monitor function provides displaying current Making backups of the system programming data
status of “Error Log,” “Device Status” and “Traffic and keeping it is extremely important in the
Information” individually on the screen. unlikely event that system programming data are
lost in a system failure.
Error Log Backup Utility consists of “save” and “load.”
When a system maintenance object begins to fail Save is to transmit a file of data from your system
periodic testing, the system automatically to backup device.
generates an error record which is stored in the Load is to send a file of data on your system from
Error Log. backup device.
Consulting the error log should be the first step in Before beginning saving or loading, check
diagnosing system related troubles. carefully that you are going to the direction you
For further information, refer to Section 14-D- want.
2.02 “Consulting the Error Log.” It’s very easy to erase files if you make a mistake
and confuse saving and loading.
Device Status Starting up the backup operation can be done
Provides information about current operation both at on-site and from a remote location.
status of the following items individually on the Refer to Section 16 “Backup-Utility on-site” and
screen. Section 17 “Backup Utility-Remote Location” for
further information.
• System
• Card
• Port
• Conference Trunk

Traffic
Provides current traffic information about
following items individually.

• Station
• Trunk Group
• Attendant Console
• DISA
• OGM1
• OGM2
• AGC

Refer to Section 14-G “Monitor” for further


information about monitor.

1-D-3
E. System Configuration

1.00 Basic Shelf


Basic Shelf is always required. Basic Shelf consists of the followings.
Basic Shelf contains its own power supply and 15
mounting spaces called “Slot.” CPU card and No. Name Number
T-SW card are installed at factory.
1 POWER-for Power Unit 1
Basic Slot 2 is provided for installing the optional
2 BS1 (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card 1
T-SW OHCA card.
3 BS2 (Basic Slot 2) 1
The remaining 12 slots provide mounting space
- for optional T-SW OHCA card
for the various cards that can be used. Any
4 BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card 1
optional service card can be mounted in any of
5 FS1 to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12) 12
these 12 slots.
- for optional service card
So these slots are called “Free Slot.”

Construction of Basic Shelf

P F F F F F F F F F F F F B B B
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
E
R

Free Slot can be equipped with the following


optional service cards.

a. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card p. Remote circuit (RMT) Card
b. Loop start central office trunk with Pay- q. Attendant console Line circuit (ATLC) Card
Tone Detection (PCOT) Card r. E&M Card
c. Loop start central office trunk with Polarity s. T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
d. Ground start central office trunk (GCOT) t. E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
e. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card
f. Proprietary ITS Line circuit (PLC) Card
g. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC)
Card
h. Single line telephone line circuit with
Message Waiting (MSLC) Card
i. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card
j. Both-way direct inward dialing access
(DID-W) Card
k. MFC direct inward dialing access (DID-
MFC) Card
l. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card
m. Doorphone circuit (DPH) Card
n. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card
o. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card

1-E-1
2.00 Expansion Shelf
Expansion Shelf is provided optionally. Expansion Shelf consists of the following.
Up to two Expansion Shelves (1 and 2) can be
installed on the Basic Shelf to enlarge the ability No. Name Number
of the system. 1 POWER-for Power Unit 1
Each Expansion Shelf contains its own power 2 FS1 to 15 (Free Slot) 15
supply and 15 mounting spaces for any optional - for optional service card
card required for system expansion.
Expansion Shelf is installed on top of the basic
shelf.

Construction of Expansion Shelf (1 and 2).

P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Free Slot can be equipped with the following


optional service cards.

a. Loop start central office trunk (LCOT) Card k. MFC direct inward dialing access (DID-
b. Loop start central office trunk with Pay- MFC) Card
Tone Detection (PCOT) Card l. Off premise extension trunk (OPX) Card
c. Loop start central office trunk with Polarity m. Doorphone circuit (DPH) Card
Reversal Detection (RCOT) Card n. Automatic Gain control (AGC) Card
d. Ground start central office trunk (GCOT) o. Direct inward system access (DISA) Card
Card p. Remote circuit (RMT) Card
e. Hybrid line circuit (HLC) Card q. Attendant console Line circuit (ATLC) Card
f. Proprietary ITS Line circuit (PLC) Card r. E&M Card
g. Single line telephone line circuit (SLC) s. T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
h. Single line telephone line circuit with t. E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Message Waiting (MSLC) Card (Free slot 1, 5 or 9 only)
i. Direct inward dialing trunk (DID) Card
j. Both-way direct inward dialing access
(DID-W) Card

1-E-2
3.00 Attendant Console 4.00 CPU Card
Functions Functions
Up to two Attendant Consoles (optional-with CRT (1)Call process and basic shelf main protocol.
display) can be equipped with the system. (Microprocessor 80C286).
Time switch (TSW) control, detection of
The attendant console allows one or two system clock alarm, basic shelf power down
attendants to answer, screen, and control and expansion shelf power down alarm,
incoming calls using Switched Loop Operation. watch dog.
With attendant operation, incoming calls can be
screened and forwarded to the proper party for (2)System switch interface.
resolution, messages taken for absent users, or There are Operation Switch (MODE) (10
forwarded to alternate locations. modes, 0 to 9) and System Administration
Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM) (10
The attendant console is not dedicated to call modes, 0 to 9) on the CPU rotary switch.
processing and feature accessing, and can be When the system lost the programming data
used for system data programming and because of system resetting, set system
diagnostics. operation mode using these switches when
starting up the system again.
Refer to Section 6 “Station Features and
Operation-Attendant Console” for further (3)Terminal interface.
information about attendant console call CPU card has two RS-232C terminal
processing features, and Section 13 “Station interfaces.
Programming-Attendant Console” for further
information about attendant console local Operation
programming mode.
(1)Operation Switch (MODE) and System
Administration Device Selection Switch
Operation
(SYSTEM) are set by turning with screw
Attendant console is operable for the following. driver.

• Call Processing mode (2)Reset switch is non-lock push switch.


• System programming
• Diagnostics (3) LED for battery alarm lights when voltage of
• Editing local data Lithium-battery becomes too low (less than
2.5V).

(4)LED for watch dog lights when CPU’s


software is running away.

(5)Watch dog is detecting CPU’s running away.

1-E-3
5.00 TSW Card 6.00 Power Unit
Functions Functions
(1)Time switch. (1)Power supply (+5, ±15, GND) for a shelf.
Capability of switching voice is 512ch x
512ch. (2)External battery interface. (+24)
Battery power (+24) is input from a battery
(2) Generation of system clocks. interface unit in basic shelf with a 2 wire
System clocks are 2,048MHz (PCM clock), cable.
8kHz (PCM frame clock).
(3)Power failure detection.
(3)Generation of call progress tone. A circuit in POW detects power failures of
Call progress tones are 350+440Hz, 620Hz, +5VDC, ±15VDC, AC power supply, and 2
480+620Hz and 440+480Hz. power alarm signals are sent to CPU card as
DC alarm and AC alarm.
(4) Conference circuit.
T-SW card has 3 party x 8 conference’s (4)Generation of bell signal. (20Hz, 100V0p)
circuits.
For CO-CO speech amp., AGC card can be
inserted to a free slot of basic or expansion
shelf.

(5)Paging interface.
T-SW card has 2 pre-amp. circuits for paging.
In order to adjust volume, each amp circuit is
equipped with a knob.

(6)Music-in interface.
T-SW card has 2 interface circuits for music
on hold or BGM.

Operation
(1)A knob for adjusting volume of external
paging is turned with a screw driver from front
of T-SW card.

(2)LED indicator or the T-SW card lights when


system reset or T-SW local reset occurs.

1-E-4
7.00 LCOT Card 8.00 RCOT Card
Functions Functions
LCOT (KX-T96180)-----Loop Start Central Office RCOT (KX-T96183) ----Loop Start Central Office
Trunk card (8 CO Lines/ Trunk with Polarity
card) Reversal Detection card
(8 CO Lines/card)
(1)Loop start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver. (1)Loop start CO interface.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
through a resistance the tip and ring (both With loop start, you seize a line by bridging
wires) of your telephone line. through a resistance the tip and ring (both
wires) of your telephone line.
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO (2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
interface circuit, and directly to LCOT PFT Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO
modular. When power failure occurs, CO interface circuit, and directly to RCOT PFT
Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT modular. When power failure occurs, CO
Tip/Ring leads, but LCOT PFT modular and Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT
SLT PFT modular should be connected each Tip/Ring leads, but RCOT PFT modular and
other with connection cord in advance. SLT PFT modular should be connected each
other with connection cord in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of (3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
each port. A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic each port.
relay in an LCOT of a system is activated. During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in an RCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
LED indicator on the LCOT card lights when the Operation
system reset or LCOT local reset occurs. LED indicator on the RCOT card lights when the
system reset or RCOT local reset occurs.

1-E-5
(70695)
9.00 PCOT Card 10.00 GCOT Card
Functions (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
PCOT (KX-T96180)-----Loop Start Central Office Functions
Trunk with Pay Tone
Detection card (4 CO GCOT (KX-T96181) ----Ground Start Central Office
Lines/card) Trunk card (8 CO Lines/
card)
(1)Loop start CO interface.
CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver. (1)Ground start CO interface.
With loop start, you seize a line by bridging CPC detection, 1 DTMF driver.
through a resistance the tip and ring (both A way of signaling on subscriber trunks in which
wires) of your telephone line. one side of the two wire trunk (typically the
Pay tone detection (12kHz/16kHz) “Ring” conductor of the Tip and Ring) is
momentarily grounded to get dial tone.
(2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO (2)Power failure transfer (PFT) by each port.
interface circuit, and directly to PCOT PFT Tip/Ring of CO are connected to a CO interface
modular. When power failure occurs, CO circuit, and directly to GCOT PFT modular.
Tip/Ring leads are directly connected to SLT When power failure occurs, CO Tip/Ring leads
Tip/Ring leads, but PCOT PFT modular and are directly connected to SLT Tip/Ring leads,
SLT PFT modular should be connected each but GCOT PFT modular and SLT PFT modular
other with connection cord in advance. should be connected each other with
connection cords in advance.
(3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of (3)Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
each port. A diagnostic relay is placed in Tip/Ring of each
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic port.
relay in an PCOT of a system is activated. During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic relay
in a GCOT of a system is activated.
Operation
Operation
LED indicator on the PCOT card lights when the
LED indicator on the GCOT card lights when the
system reset or PCOT local reset occurs.
system reset or GCOT local reset occurs.

1-E-6
(70695)
11.00 PLC Card 12.00 SLC Cards
Functions 12.01 SLC Card
PLC card (KX-T96172) Functions

(1)PITS and DSS console interface. (8 circuits/ SLC card (KX-T96174)


card)
Maximum loop resistance : 40 ohms (1)Standard SLT interface.
Power supply 1 : +30V (supplied through Maximum loop resistance : 600 ohms.
speech path, and with (including SLT)
current limitation circuit). Power supply : +30V (with current limitation
Power supply 2 : +15V (supplied through circuit.)
data line). 2 DTMF receivers, dial pulse detector.

(2)PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-T123235, KX- (2)Power Failure Transfer (PFT) by ports 1


T7130) interface with OHCA feature. through 8*.
When a PITS with OHCA feature is connected When power failure occurs, SLT Tip / Ring are
to a port, an OHCA piggy back card (KX- led by a PFT relay, but SLT PFT modular and
T96136) should be mounted to its interface LCOT / GCOT modular should be connected
circuit. each other by connection cords in advance.

Operation * 3 ports are available for KX-T96174X.

LED indicator on the PLC card lights when the (3) Diagnostic transfer (DT) by each port.
system reset or PLC local reset occurs. Diagnostic relay is placed in Tip / Ring of each
port.
During diagnostic test, only one diagnostic
relay in the SLT of a system is activated.

Operation
LED indicator on the SLC card lights when
system reset or SLC local reset occurs.

12.02 SLC-M Card


Functions
SLC-M Card (KX-T96175)

(1)
(2) Same as 12.01 SLC Card
(3)
(4) SLT with Message Waiting Lamp interface
Power supply to Message Waiting
Lamp: +80VDC (when 1mA)

Operation
Same as 10.01 SLC Card

1-E-7
(70695)(E)
13.00 HLC Card 14.00 ATLC Card
Functions Functions
HLC card (KX-T96170) is for PITS, DSS console (1)ATLC card. (KX-T96141)
and SLT. Attendant console interface. (2 circuits / card)
(8 extensions / card) (Attendant console : KX-T96300)

(1)Standard SLT interface. SLT interface is quite Operation


same as that of SLT card.
LED indicator on the ATLC card lights when the
system reset or attendant console local reset
(2)PITS and DSS console interface. PITS and
occurs.
DSS console interface is quite same as that of
PLC card.

(3)Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-


T123235, KX-T7130) with OHCA feature.
Interface for PITS (KX-T123230D, KX-
T123235, KX-T7130) with OHCA feature is
quite same as that of PLC.

(4)Power failure transfer by each port. (when


using SLT)
Power failure transfer is quite same as that of
SLC card.

(5) Diagnostic transfer by each port. Diagnostic


transfer is quite same as that of SLC card.

Operation
LED indicator on the HLC card lights when the
system reset or HLC local reset occurs.

1-E-8
(70695)
15.00 DISA Card 16.00 DID Card
Functions Functions
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) card. (1) DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card (KX-T96182)
(KX-T96191)
Wink start/immediate start DID interface.
(1)4 OGM trunks. (4 circuits/card)
OGM duration : 30 seconds, 45V used in circuits is originated from DC-DC
OGM Battery Backup : 5 days. converter in DID card.
The number of OGM : 1, DID card will receive pulse signal only.
Recording Algorithm : ADPCM.
(2) Both-way DID card (KX-T96182D)
(2)4 CO-CO speech paths without amp. Wink start/immediate start DID interface. (4
A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path circuits/card)
and down-path. a) Incoming
Up-path is from call-originate CO to call- • 45V used in circuit is originated from DC-
answer CO, and 1 DTMF receiver and one DC converter in DID card.
speech end detector is connected to it. • Signaling - Pulse/DTMF
Down-path is from call-answer CO to call- b) Outgoing
originate CO and one speech end detector is • Seize a line by bridging through a
connected to it. resistance between tip and ring.
• Signaling - Pulse/DTMF
(3)Speech end detector.
Speech end detector detects call progress (3) DID card with MFC (KX-T96182CE)
tones. Wink start/immediate start DID interface. (4
circuits/card)
Operation a) Incoming
• 48V used in circuit is originated from DC-
LED indicator on the DISA card lights when the
DC converter in DID card.
system reset or DISA local reset occurs.
• Signaling - MFC-R2
b) Outgoing
• Seize a line by bridging through a
resistance between tip and ring.
• Signaling - MFC-R2 signal

Operation
LED indicator on the DID card lights when the
system reset or DID local reset occurs.

1-E-9
(70695)
17.00 OPX Card 18.00 DPH Card
Functions Functions
OPX (KX-T96185)-----Off Premise Extension. Doorphone card (KX-T96161)
(4 OPX Lines / card)
OPX Power Unit is (1)Doorphone interface (4 circuits / card)
necessary. 4 doorphones can be connected using a
modular connector.
OPX Power Unit should be connected with OPX Doorphone chime is sent to both extension
card, and Single Line Telephones for OPX should and doorphone at a time when a doorphone
be connected with OPX card. button is pressed.

(2) Door opener interface (4 circuits / card)


DPH card has 4 relays for door opener.
(120VAC, 1A)
The relay opens for doorlock, closes for door
release. It also opens in the case of power
failure.

Operation
Terminal plate on the DPH card has 8 terminals,
2 leads from door opener are directly connected
to two of 8 terminals.
Operation interval of door opener is 3 seconds.

1-E-10
(70695)
19.00 AGC Card 20.00 RMT Card
Functions Functions
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) card RMT (Remote Circuit) card (KX-T96196)
(KX-T96193)
Modem (300/1200 bps) for remote administration.
(1)4 CO-CO speech paths with AGC Amp. and Modem protocol (1) free wheeling (TTY).
Echo-Suppressor.
A CO-CO speech path consists of up-path Operation
and down-path, up-path is from call-originate
LED indicator on the RMT card lights when the
CO to call-answer CO, and AGC amp is
system reset or RMT local reset occurs.
inserted and speech end detector is
connected.
Maximum amplitude rate of AGC is 14 dB.
Echo-Suppressor is inserted in a CO-CO
speech path.

(2) 4 DTMF transceivers.


DTMF transceiver is used as DTMF repeater.
So, AGC card microprocessor controls DTMF
repeater.

(3) 8 Speech End Detectors.


Speech end detector of AGC is quite same as
that of DISA card.

Operation
LED indicator on the AGC card lights when the
system reset or AGC local reset occurs.

1-E-11
(70695)(E)
21.00 T-SW Conference Expan- 23.00 T-SW OHCA Expansion
sion Card Card
Functions Functions
T-SW Conference Expansion card (KX-T336104)
T-SW OHCA Expansion card (KX-T336105)
Mounted on T-SW card.
3 party x 64 conference circuits. This card is mounted on Basic Slot 2 for OHCA
feature.
OHCA card (KX-T96136) for extension port must
be installed on the HLC card or PLC card in
advance.

22.00 OHCA Card


24.00 OPX Power Unit
Functions
Functions
OHCA (Off Hook Call Announcement) card
(KX-T96136) OPX (Off Premise Extension) Power Unit
(KX-T96186).
This card is mounted on HLC card (KX-T96170)
or PLC card (KX-T96172) Input: 115/200/220/240V (voltage selector)
Output is Ringing Signal (100VAC, 20Hz) and
This card includes 2 OHCA circuits. 48V DC for OPX Card.
Allows an extension user to intrude through the
speaker into another extension that is in
conversation using the handset.
This feature is available only against the following
PITS telephones: KX-T123230D, KX-T123235,
KX-T7130.

1-E-12
(70695)(E)
25.00 E&M Card 26.00 T-1 Digital Trunk Card
Functions Functions
(1) E&M (Tie) Line Types........ Type 5 only. T-1 interface.(1 circuit / card)
(2) Transmission.....................2-wire/4-wire T-1 is a digital transmission link with a capacity of
voice path 1.544 Mbps.
(Programmable) A T-1 card carries 24 voice conversations.
(Note) Maximum cabling distance of E&M line Frame Format : D4 / ESF
cord (twisted cable): 22 AWG: Under Line Coding : AMI / B8ZS
9.6 km Channel Type : LCO / GCO / DID / OPX / TIE
(3) Transmission levels Signaling : DP / DTMF
2-wire voice path............... -3 dB (DTMF:24 receivers and 6 generators)
(transmit/receive)
4-wire voice path............... -3 dB normal Operation
(transmit/receive)
RED LED indicator on T-1 card lights when the
Programmable (-6 dB,-3 dB,0 dB,+3 dB)
system reset or T-1 card local reset, T-1 line fault
(4) Signaling DTMF/Pulse
occurs.
(5) E lead Battery -48 VDC, 20 mA to
ground (max.)
Sensitivity 5 mA or 2000 Ω to
(min)
ground (max.)
(6) M lead Permitted current : 30mA (max.)
Permitted voltage: _ +100V (max.)

1-E-13
(70695)
27.00 E-1 Digital Trunk Card
Functions
E-1 interface.(1 circuit / card)
E-1 is a digital transmission link with a capacity of
2.048Mbps.
An E-1 card carries 30 voice conversations.
Frame Format : PCM30 / PCM30-CRC
Line Coding : HDB3 / AMI
Channel Type : DR2 / E&M-C /E&M-P
Signaling : DP / DTMF / MFC-R2
(DTMF:8 receivers and 2 generators)
(MFC-R2:16 receivers and 16 generators)

Operation
RED LED indicator on E-1 card lights when the
system reset or E-1 card local reset, E-1 line fault
occurs.

1-E-14
(70695)
Section 2

Installation
(Section 2)

Installation
Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 2-A-1

1.00 Introduction............................................................................................ 2-A-1


2.00 Before Installation.................................................................................. 2-A-2

B Installation of Shelf........................................................................................... 2-B-1

1.00 Basic Shelf............................................................................................. 2-B-1


1.01 Basic Shelf Assembly.................................................................. 2-B-2
1.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-3
1.03 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-5
2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System................................................................. 2-B-6
2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly.......................................................... 2-B-7
2.02 Removing the Panels .................................................................. 2-B-8
2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf......................................................... 2-B-10
2.04 Installation of Top Cover.............................................................. 2-B-11
2.05 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-12
3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System................................................................. 2-B-13
3.01 Stacking on the 2-Shelf System .................................................. 2-B-14
3.02 Installation of Top Cover.............................................................. 2-B-15
3.03 Cable Connections...................................................................... 2-B-16
4.00 Ground Wiring........................................................................................ 2-B-18
5.00 Fixing on the Floor................................................................................. 2-B-19
5.01 Setting Out and Drilling................................................................ 2-B-19
5.02 Fixing on the Floor....................................................................... 2-B-22

C Installation of Cards......................................................................................... 2-C-1

1.00 Before Installation.................................................................................. 2-C-1


1.01 Slot Construction......................................................................... 2-C-1
1.02 Guide Plate.................................................................................. 2-C-2
2.00 Connection of Standard System ........................................................... 2-C-3
2.01 CPU Card.................................................................................... 2-C-3
2.02 T-SW Card................................................................................... 2-C-3
2.03 Power Unit................................................................................... 2-C-3
3.00 Connection of Optional Cards ............................................................... 2-C-4
3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104)...................... 2-C-4
3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105)................................................ 2-C-5
3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136)............................................................ 2-C-6
3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141)............................................................. 2-C-9
3.05 DPH Card (KX-T96161)............................................................... 2-C-10
3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170)............................................................... 2-C-14
3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172)............................................................... 2-C-16
3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174)............................................................... 2-C-18
3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180)............................................................. 2-C-21

2-1
Page
3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181) (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)......... 2-C-22
3.11 DID Card ..................................................................................... 2-C-25
1. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for U.S.A. and Canada).................... 2-C-25
2. DID Card (KX-T96182)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-1
3. Both-way DID Card (KX-T96182D)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-2
4. MFC DID Card (KX-T96182CE)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)............................... 2-C-25-3
3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185)............................................................... 2-C-26
3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191).............................................................. 2-C-28
3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193) .............................................................. 2-C-28
3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196).............................................................. 2-C-28
3.16 E&M Card (KX-T96184).............................................................. 2-C-28-1
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
3.17 T-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96187)............................................ 2-C-28-9
3.18 E-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96188) ........................................... 2-C-28-14
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions .................................................. 2-C-29
5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer ................................... 2-C-30
6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D)...................................... 2-C-32

D Connection of Optional Peripheral Equipments............................................... 2-D-1

1.00 Paging Equipment ................................................................................. 2-D-1


2.00 External Music Source........................................................................... 2-D-2
3.00 RS-232C Interface................................................................................. 2-D-3
3.01 Connection to the Printer............................................................. 2-D-5
3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal................................................. 2-D-6

E Installation of Attendant Console..................................................................... 2-E-1

1.00 Configuration ......................................................................................... 2-E-1


2.00 Attendant Console Assembly................................................................. 2-E-3
3.00 Handset Connection.............................................................................. 2-E-4
4.00 Installation and Removal of CRT Unit.................................................... 2-E-5
4.01 CRT Unit Installation.................................................................... 2-E-5
4.02 CRT Unit Removal....................................................................... 2-E-7
5.00 Keyboard Connection............................................................................ 2-E-8
6.00 Connection with KX-T336 System ........................................................ 2-E-9
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection................................................................... 2-E-10
8.00 Various Adjustments.............................................................................. 2-E-11

F Starting Up the KX-T336 System..................................................................... 2-F-1

2-2
(70695)
Page
1.00 System Power-Up Procedure................................................................ 2-F-1
2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features................................................................. 2-F-2
2.01 Operation Switch (MODE)........................................................... 2-F-2
2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM)....... 2-F-5
2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up.............................. 2-F-6

2-3
(70695)
A. Preparation

1.00 Introduction
This section describes the procedures required to install the KX-T336 System.
Detailed instructions for planning the installation site, installing the shelves and optional
cards, and cabling of peripheral equipments are provided.
Further information on system expansion and peripheral equipment installation is
included.

2-A-1
2.00 Before Installation
Please read the following notes concerning installations and connections before installing the
KX-T336 system.

1) Installation Cautions 2) Wiring Cautions


• Avoid installing the KX-T336 system in the • Make sure to keep the following
following places. (Doing so may result in instructions when wiring.
malfunction, noise, or discoloration.)
1. Do not wire the telephone cable in parallel
1. In direct sunlight and hot, cold, or humid with an AC power source, computer, telex,
places. [Temperature range: 32°F-104°F etc. If the cables are run near those wires,
(0°C-40°C)] shield the cables with metal tubing or use
shielded cables and ground the shields.
2. Sulfuric gases produced in areas where
there are thermal springs, etc. may 2. If cables are run on the floor, use
damage the equipment or contacts. protectors or the like to protect the wires
where they may be stepped on. Avoid
3. Places in which shocks or vibrations are wiring under carpets.
frequent or strong.
3. Avoid sharing the same power supply
4. Dusty places, or places where water or oil outlet for computers, telexes, and other
may come into contact with the unit. office equipments. Otherwise, the
operation of KX-T336 system may be
5. Near high-frequency generating devices interrupted by the induction noise from
such as sewing machines or electric such equipments.
welders.
4. Please use one pair telephone wire for
6. On or near computers, telexes, or other extension connection of (telephone)
office equipments, as well as microwave equipments such as single line telephone,
ovens or air conditioners. data terminal, answering machine,
(It is preferable not to be installed in the computer etc., except proprietary
same room with the above equipment.) telephone (KX-T7130, KX-T7030, KX-
T123230D etc.,).
7. Install at least 6 feet (1.8 m) away from
televisions. (both the KX-T336 system and
EMSS proprietary telephones)

8. Do not obstruct area around the KX-T336


system. (for reasons of maintenance and
inspection—be especially careful to allow
space for cooling above and at the sides of
the KX-T336 system)

2-A-2
B. Installation of Shelf
This subsection describes the installation of the shelf, with information on expanding the
capacity of an existing system.

Building Block System provides the enlargement of system's ability by installing the
optional Expansion Shelf.
Up to two Expansion Shelves can be installed to the system.
Each expansion shelf can be equipped with up to 120 lines (including Extensions and
CO lines).

The system can consist of one, two or three shelves (Basic, Expansion 1 and
Expansion 2).
Each shelf contains its own power supply.

1.00 Basic Shelf


Basic Shelf is always required and it can be equipped with up to 96 lines (including
Extension and CO lines).
The basic shelf includes top cover and base shelf.

The following figure shows a basic system composed of a basic shelf only.

2-B-1
1.01 Basic Shelf Assembly

Top Cover
15

1 16

2 17
18
3 19
4
Basic Shelf
5
6
7

9 20
10
11
12 21 Base Shelf
13

14

1. Side Panel (Left) 13. Ground Wire Connector (GND)


2. Power Unit 14. Base Front Panel
3. Power Indicator 15. LED Cable
4. Power Switch 16. LED Cable Connector
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Basic Shelf) (Connects the LED Cable)
5. Backup Battery Connector 17. Side Panel (Right)
(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable) 18. Flat Cable Connector
6. Fuse (Connects the Flat Cable from Expansion
7. Power Supply Cable Shelf)
8. Front Panel 19. Cable Opening
9. Transform Cord 20. Base Board
10. Base Side Panel (Left) 21. Battery Adaptor Compartment
11. Power Supply Cable Connector
12. Main Power Switch
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Whole Unit)

2-B-2
1.02 Removing the Panels

Front Panel

1. Rotate the key on the front panel


counterclockwise to unlock.
2. Open the front panel toward you at right
angles to the basic shelf.
3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Base Front Panel

1. Open the base front panel toward you while


holding down the button on the panel.
2. Pull out the base front panel to the right.

2-B-3
Side Panel

Screws Screws

Screws
Screws

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the eight screws.


2. Remove the upper left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Base Side Panel

Screws

Screws

1. Remove the lower left side panel by loosening the four screws.

Note :
If the system is to be expanded to 2-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-2.00
“Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

2-B-4
1.03 Cable Connections

LED Cable

• Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the
LED cable connector (on the basic shelf).

LED cable

Power Supply Cable

• Plug the power supply cable (on the basic


shelf) into the power supply cable connector
labeled “AC OUT 1” (on the base shelf).

power supply cable

2-B-5
2.00 Expansion to 2-Shelf System
The KX-T336 System can be expanded to 2-Shelf System by installing the Expansion
Shelf 1 on the Basic Shelf.
The 2-Shelf system can be equipped with up to 216 lines (including extensions and CO
lines).

The following figure shows a 2-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and an expansion
shelf.

2-B-6
2.01 Expansion Shelf Assembly

1 9

10
2
11
3
4
12
5
6
7

1. Side Panel (Left) 8. Front Panel


2. Power Unit 9. LED Cable Connector
3. Power Indicator (Connects the LED Cable)
4. Power Switch 10. Side Panel (Right)
(Turns ON and OFF the Power of Expansion 11. Flat Cable
Shelf) 12. Cable Opening
5. Backup Battery Connector
(Connects the Battery Adaptor Cable)
6. Fuse
7. Power Supply Cable

Note :
The construction of Expansion Shelf 1 and Expansion Shelf 2 is identical to each other.

2-B-7
2.02 Removing the Panels
<Basic Shelf>
Removing the Top Cover
1)

Screws

Screws

LED cable connector

LED cable

2)

Top cover

1. Disconnect the LED cable (on the top cover) from the LED cable connector (on the
basic shelf).
2. Remove the top cover by loosening the four screws.

2-B-8
<Expansion Shelf>
Front Panel

1. Rotate the key on the front panel


counterclockwise to unlock.
2. Open the front panel toward you at right
angles to the expansion shelf.
3. Remove the front panel by lifting it straight up.

Side Panel

Screws Screws

Guides Screws

Screws

1. Remove the right side panel by loosening the four screws.


2. Remove the left side panel by loosening the four screws.

2-B-9
2.03 Stacking on the Basic Shelf

1)
• To connect the expansion shelf with basic shelf,
place the holes of the expansion shelf exactly
on the holes of the basic shelf.

Expansion
shelf

Basic shelf

2)

Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them


with the three screws immediately to prevent
the expansion shelf from falling down.

Note :
If the system is to be expanded to 3-Shelf System, proceed to Section 2-B-3.00
“Expansion to 3-Shelf System.”

2-B-10
2.04 Installation of Top Cover

1) • To connect the top cover, place the holes of the


top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion
Top cover
shelf.

Expansion
shelf Note:
Before installing the top cover, remove a screw
as shown in the illustration above. Otherwise the
top cover cannot be installed properly.
This screw is necessary for installing an
expansion shelf.

2)

Screws
Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to
prevent the top cover from falling down.

2-B-11
2.05 Cable Connections
LED Cable/Flat Cable

Top cover

LED cable
Expansion shelf
connector

Flat cable

Basic shelf

Flat cable
connector

Base shelf

1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion
shelf).
2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf) into the flat cable connector (on the basic
shelf).

Power Supply Cable


Top cover

Expansion shelf

Power
supply cable

Basic shelf

Base shelf

• Plug the power supply cable into the power supply cable connector (“AC OUT 2”).

2-B-12
3.00 Expansion to 3-Shelf System
The KX-T336 System can be expanded to 3-Shelf System by installing the Expansion
Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System.
Up to 336 lines (including extensions and CO lines) can be equipped with 3-Shelf
System.

Note :
Before stacking the Expansion Shelf 2 on the 2-Shelf System, remove the front panel
and side panels from Expansion Shelf 2 following the procedures described in Section
2-B-2.00 “Expansion to 2-Shelf System.”

The figure below shows a 3-Shelf System composed of a basic shelf and two expansion
shelves.

2-B-13
3.01 Stacking on the 2-Shelf System
1)
• To connect the expansion shelf 2 with 2-Shelf
System, place the holes of the expansion shelf
Expansion 2 exactly on the holes of the expansion shelf 1.
shelf 2

Expansion
shelf 1

2)

Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the three screws immediately to
prevent the expansion shelf 2 from falling down.

2-B-14
3.02 Installation of Top Cover
1)
Top cover • To connect the top cover, place the holes of the
top cover exactly on the holes of the expansion
shelf 2.

2)
Screws
Screws

• When the holes are placed properly, fix them with the four screws immediately to
prevent the top cover from falling down.

2-B-15
3.03 Cable Connections
LED Cable/Flat Cable

LED
cable

Flat
cable

Flat cable
connector

1. Plug the LED cable (on the top cover) into the LED cable connector (on the expansion
shelf 2).
2. Plug the flat cable (on the expansion shelf 2) into the flat cable connector (on the basic
shelf).

2-B-16
Power Supply Cable

Top cover

Expansion shelf 2

Expansion shelf 1

Power
supply cable

Basic shelf

Base shelf

• Plug the power supply cable (on the Expansion Shelf 2) into the power supply cable
connector (“AC OUT 3”).

2-B-17
4.00 Ground Wiring

IMPORTANT!!!
Make sure to connect the frame of the KX-T336 system
to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

• Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector (GND).

2-B-18
5.00 Fixing on the Floor
5.01 Setting Out and Drilling
1) Basic System (Basic Shelf)

14 31/32"

1 3/8"

12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):


Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-19
2) 2-Shelf System (Basic Shelf + Expansion Shelf 1)

26 25/32"

1 3/8"

12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):


Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-20
3) 3-Shelf System (Basic Shelf + Expansion Shelf 1 + Expansion Shelf 2)

40"

1 3/8"
12 14/32"
(A) 10 10/32"
2 2/32"

11 12/32" 13 5/32"

1 10/32"
2 4/32" 2 4/32"

• Location of the anchor plug (A):


Drill the hole for the anchor plug on the floor in
accordance with the measurements.
• Drive the anchor plug into the hole.
Hammer
Note:
When fixing the KX-T336 System to the floor,
anchor plugs should always be used to prevent
the system from falling down.
Anchor plug

Hole
1 4/32 inch

8/32 inch

2-B-21
5.02 Fixing on the Floor

1)
• Attach the two floor-fixing hardwares to the
basic shelf as shown in the figure.
Fasten each hardware with four screws.

2)
• Position the shelf on the floor.
Check alignment and level of the shelf.

3)
• Fix the shelf securely to the floor using
screws and flat washers.

Screw

Latch Washer

Hole

Anchor
plug

2-B-22
C. Installation of Cards

1.00 Before Installation


1.01 Slot Construction

Expansion shelf 2
P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Expansion shelf 1
P F F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
E
R

Basic shelf
P F F F F F F F F F F F F B B B
O S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S
W 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3
E
R

Basic shelf Expansion shelf 1/Expansion shelf 2

No. Name Number Name Number

1 POWER - for Power Unit 1 POWER - for Power Unit 1


2 BS1 (Basic Slot 1) - for CPU card 1 FS1 to FS15 (Free Slot) 15
3 BS2 (Basic Slot 2) 1 - for optional service card
- for optional T-SW OHCA card
4 BS3 (Basic Slot 3) - for T-SW card 1
5 FS1 to 12 (Free Slot 1 to 12) 12
- for optional service card

2-C-1
1.02 Guide Plate

Screw

Guide Plate
Fig.1

(Front Side)

(Rear Side)

Card Latch
Fig.2
Fig.3

1. Before installing the service cards, remove the Guide Plate (See Fig.1) from the
upper front side of the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) by
loosening the five screws.

2. Install a service card (with facing the components side to the right) along with the
upper and lower guide rails. Press the upper and lower latch firmly until the upper
latch is located inside of the shelf. (See Fig.2 and Fig.3)
Please do not touch the components side of the service card.

3. After installing the service cards, attach the Guide Plate to the upper front side of
the basic shelf (and expansion shelf 1 and 2, if provided) with five screws.
If service cards are not installed properly, the Guide Plate will not be fixed.

2-C-2
2.00 Connection of Standard System

2.01 CPU Card


• This card is already inserted at the factory in
the “CPU” in the Basic shelf.

SYTEM

CPU

“CPU” is marked.

2.02 T-SW Card


(for U.S.A. and Canada)
• This card is already inserted at the factory in
the “TSW” in the Basic shelf.

TSW

“TSW” is marked.

(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)


Music source • This card is already inserted at the factory in
Selector Switch the “TSW” in the Basic shelf.

Music Source Selector Switch


INT MUS : Set when using the internal music
INT MUS
source
MUS 2 MUS 2 : Set when using the external
music source.
TSW

“TSW” is marked.

2-C-3
(60395)
2.03 Power Unit
• Power unit is already inserted at the factory in
the “POWER” in the Basic shelf and the
Expansion shelf 1, 2.

2-C-3-1
(60395)
3.00 Connection of Optional Cards

3.01 T-SW Conference Expansion


Card (KX-T336104)

• This card is installed on the T-SW card.


Connector
(30-pin)

“TSW CONF” is marked.

1) Connection to the T-SW card

T-SW Conference Card


30-pin connector
(Plug)

Make sure the card is in


the correct direction

KX-T336104 TSW-CONF

30-pin connector
(Jack)

T-SW Card

1. Insert the 30-pin connector (plug) on the T-SW CONF card into the 30-pin connector
(jack) on the T-SW card.
2. Install the T-SW card into the Basic Slot 1 (BS1). See page 2-C-3.

2-C-4
3.02 T-SW OHCA Card (KX-T336105)

• Insert this card into the Basic Slot 2 (BS2).


OHCA

“OHCA” is marked.

2-C-5
3.03 OHCA Card (KX-T96136)

• This card is installed on the HLC card or PLC


connector card.
(5-pin)

connector
(9-pin)
connector
(4-pin)
OHCA

“OHCA” is marked.

1) Connection to the HLC card (KX-T96170)


9-pin connector
(plug)
5-pin connector
(plug)
4-pin connector
(plug)

OHCA card
9-pin connector
(jack)
5-pin connector
(jack)
4-pin connector
(jack)

HLC card

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.
2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the HLC
card.
3. Install the HLC card into a free slot. See page 2-C-14.
Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to
page 2-C-8.
The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123235, KX-T123230D or KX-T7130.

2-C-6
(E)
2) Connection to the PLC card (KX-T96172)

5-pin connector
(plug)
9-pin connector
(plug)
4-pin connector
(plug)

OHCA card

5-pin connector
(jack)
9-pin connector
(jack)
4-pin connector
(jack)

PLC card

1. Make sure that the extensions which use OHCA function have OHCA cards.
2. Insert the connector (plug) on the OHCA card into the connector (jack) on the PLC
card.
3. Install the PLC card to a free slot. See page 2-C-16.

Two extensions are available for the OHCA function with one OHCA card. Refer to
page 2-C-8.
The OHCA function is provided with the following PITS telephones only:
KX-T123235, KX-T123230D or KX-T7130.

2-C-7
3) Wiring Table

CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP Extension OHCA • Connection of the Proprietary Telephones:
PIN NO. Extension KX-T123235, KX-T123230D, or KX-T7130.
26 WHT-BLU 1 T T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice
1 BLU-WHT 2 R R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice
27 WHT-ORN 3 NO.1 D1
2 ORN-WHT 4 D2 • OHCA NO.
28 WHT-GRN 5 P1
3 GRN-WHT 6 P2 NO1
29 WHT-BRN 7 T (HLC card)
4 BRN-WHT 8 R
30 WHT-SLT 9 NO.2 D1
5 SLT-WHT 10 D2 OHCA
31 RED-BLU 11 P1 NO 4
6 BLU-RED 12 P2
32 RED-ORN 13 T
OHCA
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 NO.3 D1 NO 3
8 GRN-RED 16 D2
34 RED-BRN 17 P1
OHCA
9 BRN-RED 18 P2 NO2
NO 2
35 RED-SLT 19 T
10 SLT-RED 20 R
36 BLK-BLU 21 NO.4 D1 OHCA
11 BLU-BLK 22 D2 NO 1
37 BLK-ORN 23 P1
12 ORN-BLK 24 P2
38 BLK-GRN 25 T
13 GRN-BLK 26 R
39 BLK-BRN 27 NO.5 D1
14 BRN-BLK 28 D2
40 BLK-SLT 29 P1 (PLC card)
15 SLT-BLK 30 P2 NO3
41 YEL-BLU 31 T
16 BLU-YEL 32 R
42 YEL-ORN 33 NO.6 D1 OHCA OHCA
17 ORN-YEL 34 D2 NO 3 NO 4
43 YEL-GRN 35 P1
18 GRN-YEL 36 P2
44 YEL-BRN 37 T
19 BRN-YEL 38 R
45 YEL-SLT 39 NO.7 D1
20 SLT-YEL 40 D2
46 VIO-BLU 41 P1
21 BLU-VIO 42 P2 NO4
47 VIO-ORN 43 T
22 ORN-VIO 44 R OHCA OHCA
48 VIO-GRN 45 D1 NO 1 NO 2
23 GRN-VIO 46 NO.8 D2
49 VIO-BRN 47 P1
24 BRN-VIO 48 P2
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

2-C-8
(10991)
3.04 ATLC Card (KX-T96141)

• Insert this card into a free slot.

“ATLC” is marked.

KX-T96141

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring)

26 AWG: Under 680 feet


24 AWG: Under 1130 feet
22 AWG: Under 1770 feet

2) Connection to the Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

Attendant Console (KX-T96300)

ATLC Card (KX-T96141)


Use 2-conductor wiring cord

• Insert the modular plug of the Attendant Console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the ATLC card.

2-C-9
3.05 DPH Card (KX-T96161)

KX-T96161 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DPH” is marked.

1) Maximum cabling distance of the Doorphone and the Door Opener line.

26 AWG: Under 230 feet


24 AWG: Under 370 feet
22 AWG: Under 590 feet

Doorphone

Door Opener
26 AWG: Under 230 feet
24 AWG: Under 370 feet
22 AWG: Under 590 feet

2-C-10
2) Installation of the Doorphone (KX-T30865)

1. Loosen the screw to separate the doorphone


into two halves.

2. Install the base cover to the wall with two


screws.

• Two kinds of screws are included.


Please choose appropriate one according to
your wall type. See the following.

..........When the doorphone plate has been


fixed to the wall.
..........When you wish to install the
doorphone directly to the wall.

3. Connect the wires from the terminal box to the


screws located in the front cover.

To the terminal box


(See page 2-C-12)
4. Secure both halves together and re-install the
screw.

2-C-11
3) Wiring of the Doorphone

4-conductor wiring
is required.

Terminal Box 1

Doorphone 1 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 2 (KX-T30865)


YELLOW BLACK
RED GREEN

DPH Card
(KX-T96161)
4-conductor wiring
is required.

Terminal Box 2

Doorphone 3 (KX-T30865) Doorphone 4 (KX-T30865)

YELLOW BLACK
RED GREEN

1. Connect the DPH Card to the terminal box using a 4-conductor modular connector.
2. Connect the wires of doorphone 1 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 1.
3. Connect the wires of doorphone 2 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 1.
4. Connect the wires of doorphone 3 to the red and green screws of the terminal box 2.
5. Connect the wires of doorphone 4 to the yellow and black screws of the terminal box 2.

2-C-12
4) Connection to Door Openers

Door opener 1
Door opener 2
Door opener 3
Door opener 4

DPH Card (KX-T96161)

doorphone 1
Paired
door opener 1

doorphone 2
Paired
door opener 2

doorphone 3
Paired
door opener 3

doorphone 4
Paired
door opener 4

• Set the door opener paired with the doorphone.


Only the telephone which received the doorphone call and in conversation can open
the door using door opener. System program determines the telephones that can
receive the doorphone calls and use the door opener.

2-C-13
3.06 HLC Card (KX-T96170)

KX-T96170 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“HLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the HLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins.


See page 2-C-20.

2-C-14
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

DSS Console

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

Proprietary Telephone

Single Line Telephone

26 AWG: Under 2290 feet


24 AWG: Under 3700 feet
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

4) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-15
3.07 PLC Card (KX-T96172)

KX-T96172 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“PLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the PLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins.


See page 2-C-20.

2-C-16
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
DSS Console
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

Proprietary Telephone

26 AWG: Under 460 feet


24 AWG: Under 750 feet
22 AWG: Under 1180 feet

2-C-17
3.08 SLC Card (KX-T96174)

KX-T96174 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“SLC” is marked.

1) Connection of the extension line cord

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Extensions

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the extension line cord into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the SLC card.
Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins


See page 2-C-20.

2-C-18
3) Maximum cabling distance of the extension line cord (twisted cable)

26 AWG: Under 2290 feet


24 AWG: Under 3700 feet Single Line Telephone
22 AWG: Under 5900 feet

4) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-19
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Extension Line)

CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP Extension • Connection of the following Proprietary


PIN NO.
Telephones
26 WHT-BLU 1 T KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 and KX-T7130
1 BLU-WHT 2 R
27 WHT-ORN 3 NO.1 D1 T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice
2 ORN-WHT 4 D2 R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice
28 WHT-GRN 5 P1
3 GRN-WHT 6 P2
• Connection of other Proprietary Telephones
29 WHT-BRN 7 T
4 BRN-WHT 8 R Connect the only pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1”
30 WHT-SLT 9 NO.2 D1 and “D2”.
5 SLT-WHT 10 D2
31 RED-BLU 11 P1
6 BLU-RED 12 P2 • Connection of a Single Line Telephone
32 RED-ORN 13 T Connect the only pin number of “T” and “R”.
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 NO.3 D1
16
• Connection of a DSS Console
8 GRN-RED D2
34 RED-BRN 17 P1 Connect the only pin number of “D1” and “D2”.
9 BRN-RED 18 P2
35 RED-SLT 19 T
10 SLT-RED 20 R
36 BLK-BLU 21 NO.4 D1
11 BLU-BLK 22 D2
37 BLK-ORN 23 P1
12 ORN-BLK 24 P2
38 BLK-GRN 25 T
13 GRN-BLK 26 R
39 BLK-BRN 27 NO.5 D1
14 BRN-BLK 28 D2
40 BLK-SLT 29 P1
15 SLT-BLK 30 P2
41 YEL-BLU 31 T
16 BLU-YEL 32 R
42 YEL-ORN 33 NO.6 D1
17 ORN-YEL 34 D2
43 YEL-GRN 35 P1
18 GRN-YEL 36 P2
44 YEL-BRN 37 T
19 BRN-YEL 38 R
45 YEL-SLT 39 NO.7 D1
20 SLT-YEL 40 D2
46 VIO-BLU 41 P1
21 BLU-VIO 42 P2
47 VIO-ORN 43 T
22 ORN-VIO 44 R
48 VIO-GRN 45 D1
23 GRN-VIO 46 NO.8 D2
49 VIO-BRN 47 P1
24 BRN-VIO 48 P2
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

• Station wiring (3-pair twisted cabling)

2-C-20
■ Extension Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

This KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect 8 The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
extensions to the KX-T336 System.
When you want to connect 8 extensions to the KX-A204 : Cable......................... 1
connector (KX-A205), two of KX-A205 are KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ............. 1
required.

Please connect KX-A204 (Cable) to KX-A205


(Clip Terminal) as follows. Refer to the
connection chart on page 2-C-22.

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

HLC Card (KX-T96170)


or
PLC Card (KX-T96172)
or
SLC Card (KX-T96174)

KX-A204
(Cable)

2-C-20-1 (X)
(60395)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Extension Line)

Connection Chart

Conn. Cable Color Clip Number Extension • Connection of the following Proprietary
Pin No. of Dot Telephones (6-conductor wiring is required for
each extension.)
26 ORN-RED 1 1 T
1 ORN-BLK 2 1 R KX-T123230D, KX-T123235 and KX-T7130.
27 YEL-RED 3 1 No.1 D1 Connect the pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1”, “D2”,
2 YEL-BLK 4 1 D2 “P1” and “P2”.
28 GRN-RED 5 1 P1
3 GRN-BLK 6 1 P2 T: Tip D1: Data 1 P1: 3 Pair Voice (O.H.C.A.)
29 GRY-RED 7 1 T R: Ring D2: Data 2 P2: 3 Pair Voice (O.H.C.A.)
4 GRY-BLK 8 1 R
30 WHT-RED 9 1 No.2 D1 • Connection of the Proprietary Telephone
5 WHT-BLK 10 1 D2
31 ORN-RED 11 2 P1 (4-conductor wiring is required for each
6 ORN-BLK 12 2 P2 extension.)
32 YEL-RED 13 2 T Connect the pin number of “T”, “R”, “D1” and “D2”
7 YEL-BLK 14 2 R only.
33 GRN-RED 15 2 No.3 D1
8 GRN-BLK 16 2 D2
34 GRY-RED 17 2 P1 • Connection of Standard Telephone (2-conductor
9 GRY-BLK 18 2 P2 wiring is required for each extension). Connect
35 WHT-RED 19 2 T the pin number of “T” and “R” only.
10 WHT-BLK 20 2 R
36 ORN-RED 21 3 No.4 D1
11 ORN-BLK 22 3 D2
37 YEL-RED 23 3 P1 EXAMPLE:
12 YEL-BLK 24 3 P2 orange line
38 GRN-RED 25 3 T The line of pin no.26
13 GRN-BLK 26 3 R
39 GRY-RED 27 3 No.5 D1
14 GRY-BLK 28 3 D2
40 WHT-RED 29 3 P1
15 WHT-BLK 30 3 P2
41 ORN-RED 31 4 T red
16 ORN-BLK 32 4 R
42 YEL-RED 33 4 No.6 D1 white line
17 YEL-BLK 34 4 D2
43 GRN-RED 35 4 P1
The line of pin no.25
18 GRN-BLK 36 4 P2
44 GRY-RED 37 4 T
19 GRY-BLK 38 4 R
45 WHT-RED 39 4 No.7 D1
20 WHT-BLK 40 4 D2 black
46 ORN-RED 41 C P1
21 ORN-BLK 42 C P2
47 YEL-RED 43 C T
22 YEL-BLK 44 C R
48 GRN-RED 45 C D1
23 GRN-BLK 46 C No.8 D2
49 GRY-RED 47 C P1
24 GRY-BLK 48 C P2
50 WHT-RED 49 C
25 WHT-BLK 50 C Not use

C: continuos

2-C-20-2 (X)
(60395)
3.09 LCOT Card (KX-T96180)

KX-T96180 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“LCOT” is marked.

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal Board
from the Central
Office (CO)

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into
the 50-pin connector (jack) on the LCOT card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins


See page 2-C-23.

3) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-21
3.10 GCOT Card (KX-T96181)

KX-T96181 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“GCOT” is marked.

1) Connection of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal Board
from the Central
Office (CO)

• Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the Central Office Line cord (twisted cable) into
the 50-pin connector (jack) on the GCOT card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins


See page 2-C-23.

3) Auxiliary connection
See page 2-C-30.

2-C-22
◗ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Central Office Line)
CONN. CABLE COLOR CLIP CO Line
PIN NO.

26 WHT-BLU 1 T
NO.1 R
1 BLU-WHT 2
27 WHT-ORN 3 T
4 NO.2
2 ORN-WHT R
28 WHT-GRN 5 T
NO.3
3 GRN-WHT 6 R
29 WHT-BRN 7 T
NO.4
4 BRN-WHT 8 R
30 WHT-SLT 9 T
10 NO.5 R
5 SLT-WHT
31 RED-BLU 11 T
NO.6
6 BLU-RED 12 R
32 RED-ORN 13 T
NO.7
7 ORN-RED 14 R
33 RED-GRN 15 T
16 NO.8
8 GRN-RED R
34 RED-BRN 17
9 BRN-RED 18
35 RED-SLT 19
10 SLT-RED 20
36 BLK-BLU 21
11 BLU-BLK 22
37 BLK-ORN 23
12 ORN-BLK 24
38 BLK-GRN 25
13 GRN-BLK 26
39 BLK-BRN 27
14 BRN-BLK 28
40 BLK-SLT 29
15 SLT-BLK 30
41 YEL-BLU 31
16 BLU-YEL 32
42 YEL-ORN 33
17 ORN-YEL 34
43 YEL-GRN 35
18 GRN-YEL 36
44 YEL-BRN 37
19 BRN-YEL 38
45 YEL-SLT 39
20 SLT-YEL 40
46 VIO-BLU 41
21 BLU-VIO 42
47 VIO-ORN 43
22 ORN-VIO 44
48 VIO-GRN 45
23 GRN-VIO 46
49 VIO-BRN 47
24 BRN-VIO 48
50 VIO-SLT 49
25 SLT-VIO 50

• Central Office Line Wiring


50 Pin Connector Block Terminal

CO Line 1

CO Line 2

CO Line 3

Bridging Clips

2-C-23
■ Central Office Line Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

This KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect 8 The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
Central office lines to the KX-T336 System.
KX-A204 : Cable......................... one
Please connect KX-A204 (Cable) to KX-A205 KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ............. one
(Clip Terminal) as follows. Refer to the
connection chart on page 2-C-26.

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

LCOT Card
(KX-T96180)

KX-A204 (Cable)

To Terminal Board from the


Central Office (CO)

2-C-23-1 (X)
(60395)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (Central Office Line)

Connection Chart

Conn. Cable Color Clip Number CO Line EXAMPLE:


Pin No. of Dot
orange line
26 ORN-RED 1 1
1 ORN-BLK 2 1
NO.1 The line of pin no.26
27 YEL-RED 3 1 NO.2
2 YEL-BLK 4 1
28 GRN-RED 5 1 NO.3
3 GRN-BLK 6 1
red
29 GRY-RED 7 1 NO.4
4 GRY-BLK 8 1 green line
30 WHT-RED 9 1 NO.5 The line of pin no.8
5 WHT-BLK 10 1
31 ORN-RED 11 2 NO.6
6 ORN-BLK 12 2
32 YEL-RED 13 2 NO.7
7 YEL-BLK 14 2
33 GRN-RED 15 2 black
NO.8
8 GRN-BLK 16 2
34 GRY-RED 17 2
9 GRY-BLK 18 2
35 WHT-RED 19 2
10 WHT-BLK 20 2
36 ORN-RED 21 3
11 ORN-BLK 22 3
37 YEL-RED 23 3
12 YEL-BLK 24 3
38 GRN-RED 25 3
13 GRN-BLK 26 3
39 GRY-RED 27 3
14 GRY-BLK 28 3
40 WHT-RED 29 3
15 WHT-BLK 30 3
41 ORN-RED 31 4
16 ORN-BLK 32 4
42 YEL-RED 33 4
17 YEL-BLK 34 4
43 GRN-RED 35 4
18 GRN-BLK 36 4
44 GRY-RED 37 4
19 GRY-BLK 38 4
45 WHT-RED 39 4
20 WHT-BLK 40 4
46 ORN-RED 41 C
21 ORN-BLK 42 C
47 YEL-RED 43 C
22 YEL-BLK 44 C
48 GRN-RED 45 C
23 GRN-BLK 46 C
49 GRY-RED 47 C
24 GRY-BLK 48 C
50 WHT-RED 49 C
25 WHT-BLK 50 C

C: continuous

2-C-23-2 (X)
(60395)
■ To connect Amphenol 57JE type (screw-attach-type 50-pin
connector) to the Option Card, follow the procedure below.

1. The 50-pin connector (jack) on the Option 2. To attach the Amphenol 57JE type (plug) to
Card has two hook-pins. the connector, drive the accessory Screw at
Remove the upper hook-pin, taking out the the upper part, and fasten the accessory Wire
screw. Tie around the lower hook-pin and the
Amphenol 57JE type, as shown.

Option Card

Screw

Hook-pins

50-pin connector

2-C-24
3.11 DID Card
1. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DID” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line

(L) R T (H) R : Ring


T : Tip
(L) : Low
(H): High

View of TEL Jack (CO)


(L) and (H) are equipped for
the DID port No.4 only.

DID Port No.1


DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor (See “Note” below.)


wiring cord

• Insert the modular plug of the telephone line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the DID card.
(Note)
The DID port No.4 is equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads.
If you connect a 4-conductor wiring cord to this port, the on/off status of the system can be detected
through “H” and “L” leads.
When the system is on : Ground is applied.
When the system is off : Ground is not applied.

2-C-25
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
2. DID Card (KX-T96182) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DID” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line


Insert the modular plug of the telephone line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack on the DID card.

A B
A: A-wire
B: B-wire

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1


DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2-conductor
wiring cord

• The DID port No.4 is equipped with “H” and “L” leads as well as “A-wire”
and “B- wire.”
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord for connection.

• Make sure to connect the frame of the KX-T336 System to the earth ground
properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-1 (X)
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
3. Both-way DID Card (KX-T96182D) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182D • Insert this card into a free slot.


DID-2W

“DID-2W” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line


Insert the modular plug of the telephone line
cord (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jack
(DID ports 1 through 4) on the DID card.

R T R : Ring
T : Tip

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1


DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182D)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor wiring cord (See “Note” below.)

(Note)
• Make sure to match the polarity of DID lines and DID port — Ring: “–” (negative)
Tip: “+” (positive).

• The DID ports 1 through 4 are equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads in addition to “R” and “T.”
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord for connection.

• Make sure to connect the frame of the Main Unit to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-2(X)
(70695)
3.11 DID Card
4. MFC DID Card (KX-T96182CE) (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

KX-T96182CE • Insert this card into a free slot.


DID-MFC

“DID-MFC” is marked.

Connection of the Central Office Line


Insert the modular plug of the telephone line
cord (2-conductor wiring) into the modular jack
(DID ports 1 through 4) on the DID card.

T R T : Tip
R : Ring

View of TEL Jack (CO)

DID Port No.1


DID Port No.2
DID Port No.3
To Terminal Board or DID Port No.4
Modular Jacks from the DID Card (KX-T96182CE)
Central Office (CO).

Use 2- conductor wiring cord (See “Note” below.)

(Note)
• Make sure to match the polarity of DID lines and DID port — Ring: “–” (negative)
Tip: “+” (positive).

• The DID ports 1 through 4 are equipped with “H (High)” and “L (Low)” leads in addition to “R” and “T.’
However, please be sure to use 2-conductor wiring cord when connecting.

• Connect the Main Unit frame to the earth ground properly to protect the unit.

2-C-25-3(X)
(70695)
3.12 OPX Card (KX-T96185)
• Insert this card into a free slot.
KX-T96185

“OPX” is marked.

1) Connection to private lines

Single Line Telephone


22 AWG: Under 6 miles

OPX Port No.1


OPX Port No.2
OPX Port No.3
OPX Port No.4
Use 2- conductor wiring cord
OPX Card

• Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor
wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2) Connection to public lines

OPX Central
Office Line

Use 2- conductor wiring cord


OPX Card
• Insert the modular plug of the Single Line Telephone Line cord (2-conductor
wiring) into the modular jack on the OPX card.

2-C-26
3) Connection to the OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186)
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
9-pin Connector
(plug)

screw

9-pin Connector
screw
(jack)

Power Switch

OPX Card
(KX-T96185)

OPX Power Unit


120V AC 60Hz (KX-T96186)
1. Insert the 9-pin connector (plug) of the OPX
Power Unit into the 9-pin connector (jack) on
the OPX card.

To earth 2. Connect the frame of the OPX Power Unit to


ground earth ground properly to protect the unit.

3. Plug the AC Power cord of the OPX Power


Unit to the AC outlet.

4. Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power


Unit.
• The Power indicator will be lit.

2-C-27
(60395)
3) Connection to the OPX Power Unit (KX-T96186/KX-T96186B)
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
9-pin Connector
(plug)

screw

9-pin Connector
screw
(jack)

Voltage
Power Switch Selector
Power 1

OPX Card
Rear (KX-T96185)

Off Premise Extension


(OPX) Power Unit
(KX-T96186/KX-T96186B)


To AC Outlet 1. Insert the 9-pin connector (plug) of the OPX
Power Unit into the 9-pin connector (jack) on
the OPX card.

To earth 2. Connect the frame of the OPX Power Unit to


ground earth ground properly to protect the unit.
3. Check the Voltage Selector if it is set to your
household AC voltage. If not, reset the
NOTE: Voltage Selector to the correct position with a
Model No. of available OPX Power Unit screwdriver. There is no Voltage Selector for
depends on the electrical requirement in your some countries; The correct voltage is
area. already set.
4. Plug in the AC Power cord from the OPX
Power Unit.
5. Turn on the Power Switch on the OPX Power
Unit.
• The Power indicator will be lit.
■ Primary Power Fuse
If the Power Indicator light goes out, replace
the Primary Power Fuse after removing the
cause.

2-C-27-1 (X)
(60395)
3.13 DISA Card (KX-T96191)

KX-T96191 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“DISA” is marked.

3.14 AGC Card (KX-T96193)

KX-T96193 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“AGC” is marked.

3.15 RMT Card (KX-T96196)

KX-T96196 • Insert this card into a free slot.

“RMT” is marked.

2-C-28
3.16 E&M Card (KX-T96184)

• Insert this card into a free slot.

PUSH

“E&M” is marked.

1) Connection of the E&M Line cord (twisted cable)

Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

To Terminal
Board from the
E&M Line

• Connect the ground wire to the ground wire connector (GND).


•Insert the 50-pin connector (plug) of the E&M Line cord (twisted cable) into the 50-pin connector
(jack) on the E&M card.

Refer to the Installation of the Amphenol 57JE series on page 2-C-24.

2) Connection of cable pins


See pages 2-C-28-2 and 2-C-28-3.

2-C-28-1
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
Connect Number of
Cable Color Clip No E&M Line
Pin Dot
1 ORN-RED 1 1 T 2-wire or 4 - wire - send
26 ORN-BLK 2 1 R
}
2 YEL-RED 3 1 T1 4-wire - receive
27 YEL-BLK 4 1 R1
}
3 GRY-RED 5 1 E Lead
28 GRY-BLK 6 1 NO.1 SG Lead
4 WHY-RED 7 1 SB Lead
29 WHY-BLK 8 1 M1 Lead
5 ORN-RED 9 1 No connect
30 ORN-BLK 10 1 M Lead only for Type 5
6 YEL-RED 11 2 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
31 YEL-BLK 12 2 R
}
7 GRY-RED 13 2 T1 4-wire - receive
32 GRY-BLK 14 2 R1
}
8 WHY-RED 15 2 E Lead
33 WHY-BLK 16 2 NO.2 SG Lead
9 ORN-RED 17 2 SB Lead
34 ORN-BLK 18 2 M1 Lead
10 YEL-RED 19 2 No connect
35 YEL-BLK 20 2 M Lead only for Type 5
11 GRY-RED 21 3 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
36 GRY-BLK 22 3 R
}
12 WHY-RED 23 3 T1 4-wire - receive
37 WHY-BLK 24 3 R1
}
13 ORN-RED 25 3 E Lead
NO.3
38 ORN-BLK 26 3 SG Lead
14 YEL-RED 27 3 SB Lead
39 YEL-BLK 28 3 M1 Lead
15 GRY-RED 29 3 No connect
40 GRY-BLK 30 3 M Lead only for Type 5
16 WHY-RED 31 4 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
41 WHY-BLK 32 4 R
}
17 ORN-RED 33 4 T1 4-wire - receive
42 ORN-BLK 34 4 R1
}
18 YEL-RED 35 4 E Lead
43 YEL-BLK 36 4 NO.4 SG Lead
19 GRY-RED 37 4 SB Lead
44 GRY-BLK 38 4 M1 Lead
20 WHY-RED 39 4 No connect
45 WHY-BLK 40 4 M Lead only for Type 5

Note:
21~25, 46~50: No connect

2-C-28-2
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
• E&M Line Wiring

50-pin Block Terminal


Connector

E&M Line 1

Bridging Clips

2-C-28-3
(70695)
■ Connection to another KX-T336 system (KX-T96184)
2-wire voice path
KX-T96184 Another KX-T96184

4-wire voice path


KX-T96184 Another KX-T96184

■ Connection to E&M Central Office


2-wire voice path.
KX-T96184 E&M Central Office

4-wire voice path.


KX-T96184 E&M Central Office

2-C-28-4
(70695)
■ E&M Line Connection of KX-A204 (Cable)/KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)

KX-A204 (cable) enables you to connect four E&M The KX-A204/205 consists of the following:
lines to the KX-T336 System. Please connect KX-
KX-A204 : Cable ................ one
A204 (Cable) to KX-A205 (Clip Terminal) as
KX-A205 : Clip Terminal ..... one
follows. Refer to the connection chart on page 2-C-
28-6.

KX-A205 (Clip Terminal)


Connector type
50 pin (Amphenol 57JE
series or the equivalent)

E&M Card
(KX-T96184)

KX-A204 (Cable)
To Terminal Board
from the E&M Line

2-C-28-5
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be connected (E&M Line)
Connect Number
Cable Color Clip No E&M Line
Pin of Dot
1 ORN-RED 1 1 T 2-wire or 4 - wire - send
26 ORN-BLK 2 1 R
}
2 YEL-RED 3 1 T1 4-wire - receive
27 YEL-BLK 4 1 R1 }
3 GRY-RED 5 1 E Lead
28 GRY-BLK 6 1 NO.1 SG Lead
4 WHY-RED 7 1 SB Lead
29 WHY-BLK 8 1 M1 Lead
5 ORN-RED 9 1 No connect
30 ORN-BLK 10 1 M Lead only for Type 5
6 YEL-RED 11 2 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
31 YEL-BLK 12 2 R}
7 GRY-RED 13 2 T1 4-wire - receive
32 GRY-BLK 14 2 R1 }
8 WHY-RED 15 2 E Lead
33 WHY-BLK 16 2 NO.2 SG Lead
9 ORN-RED 17 2 SB Lead
34 ORN-BLK 18 2 M1 Lead
10 YEL-RED 19 2 No connect
35 YEL-BLK 20 2 M Lead only for Type 5
11 GRY-RED 21 3 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
36 GRY-BLK 22 3 R
}
12 WHY-RED 23 3 T1 4-wire - receive
37 WHY-BLK 24 3 R1
}
13 ORN-RED 25 3 E Lead
NO.3
38 ORN-BLK 26 3 SG Lead
14 YEL-RED 27 3 SB Lead
39 YEL-BLK 28 3 M1 Lead
15 GRY-RED 29 3 No connect
40 GRY-BLK 30 3 M Lead only for Type 5
16 WHY-RED 31 4 T 2-wire or 4-wire - send
41 WHY-BLK 32 4 R
}
17 ORN-RED 33 4 T1 4-wire - receive
42 ORN-BLK 34 4 R1
}
18 YEL-RED 35 4 E Lead
43 YEL-BLK 36 4 NO.4 SG Lead
19 GRY-RED 37 4 SB Lead
44 GRY-BLK 38 4 M1 Lead
20 WHY-RED 39 4 No connect
45 WHY-BLK 40 4 M Lead only for Type 5

Note:
21~25, 46~50: No connect

2-C-28-6
(70695)
■ Hardware Setting
You can choose one of the following E&M sequences using the hard switch on the KX-T96184

(OFF)
(OFF)
(OFF)

(1) Continuous E&M (Wink/Immediate)


(ON/ON/ON)

(OFF/ON/ON)
Hard switch
(ON/OFF/ON) (2) Pulsed E&M with Answer signal (Wink)

(OFF/OFF/ON) (3) Pulsed E&M without Answer signal (Wink)

(ON/ON/OFF)
Reserved
(OFF/OFF/OFF)

(1)Continuous E&M

2-C-28-7
(70695)
■ Hardware Setting (E&M Card)
(2)Pulsed E&M with Answer signal

If you select this sequence, then you must select “Wink” as a start type.

(3)Pulsed E&M without Answer signal

If you select this sequence, then you must select “Wink” as a start type.

2-C-28-8
(70695)
3.17 T-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96187)

KX-T96187 • Insert the card into Free Slot 1, 5 or


T-1
9 of any shelf.
• A maximum of six KX-T96187 can
be installed in the system.

“T-1” mark

Connecting the Central Office Line


Insert the RJ-48C plug of the telephone line
cord (4-conductor wiring) into the RJ-48C jack
(T-1 port on the KX-T96187).

T-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD


(KX-T96187)
Use 4-conductor wiring cord.

Transmit Equalizer Setting

Note:
The User cannot change this setting.

2-C-28-9
(70695)
Maximum Cabling Distance of the T-1 Line

Modular Jack
from the Central
Office (CO)

Other
KX-T96187

Note :
The T-1 line cable must be 22 AWG shielded twisted pair cable or 24 AWG UTP
(unshielded twisted pair) cable supported Category 5.

Cable Pin Numbers to be connected for KX-T96187

KX-T96187 Channel Service Unit (CSU)

KX-T96187 KX-T96187
8 Pin Modular Jack
on KX-T96187 on KX-T96187

2-C-28-10
(70695)
System Clock Mode for KX-T96187

Note:
System Clock mode is programmed by CLK command.(see 10-C-64.02)

2-C-28-11
(70695)
Short Jumper Setting for KX-T96187

SW2, SW3 SW5

NOR Normal (default) T336 Mode for KX-T336 (default)


TEST TEST (see Note) TD500 (Reserved)

Note:
Loop Back Test
The user can check KX-T96187 by the following procedure.

1. Remove T-1 cable from KX-T96187.


2. Set SW2 and SW3 to TEST position.
3. Check SYNC LED (green).
• If SYNC LED does not light or flash, KX-T96187 does not work.
4. Set SW2 and SW3 to NOR position.

2-C-28-12
(70695)
LED Indication for KX-T96187

Item Status Contents


FAULT ON Card Fault
OFF Normal
SYNC ON Clock Synchronization Error or Loss of Signal
ERROR OFF Normal
RAI ON Receive Remote Alarm Indication signal (Yellow
Alarm)
OFF Normal
AIS ON Send Alarm Indication Signal (Yellow Alarm)
OFF Normal
SYNC FLASH Clock Master at External Clock Mode
ON Detection of Signal
OFF No Detection of Signal

2-C-28-13
(70695)
3.18 E-1 Digital Trunk Card (KX-T96188)

KX-T96188 • Insert the card into Free Slot 1, 5 or


E-1
9 of any shelf.
• A maximum of four E1 DIGITAL
TRUNK CARDS can be installed in
the system.

“E-1” mark

■ Connecting the Central Office Line


Insert the coaxial plugs of the telephone line cords (2 coaxial cables)
into the coaxial jacks. (E-1 port on the KX-T96188).

■ Maximum Cabling Distance of the E-1 Line

Coaxial Jacks from


the Central Office
(CO)

Another
KX-T96188

Note:
• The E-1 line cable must be 75 ohm transmission coaxial cable.
2-C-28-14
(70695)
■ Cable Pin Numbers to be Connected for KX-T96188
KX-T96188 Central Office (CO)

KX-T96188 KX-T96188

■ System Clock Mode for KX-T96188

Note:
• System Clock mode is programmed using CLK command (See 10-C-64.02).

2-C-28-15
(70695)
■ Short Jumper Setting for KX-T96188

SW2, SW3 SW5


NOR Normal (default) T336 Mode for KX-T336 (default)

TEST TEST (see Note) TD500 (Reserved)

Note:
Loop Back Test
The user can check KX-T96188 by the following procedure.
1. Remove E-1 coaxial cables from KX-T96188.
2. Set SW2 and SW3 to TEST position.
3. Check SYNC LED (green).
• If SYNC LED does not light or flash, KX-T96188 does not work.
4. Set SW2 and SW3 to NOR position.

2-C-28-16
(70695)
■ LED Indication for KX-T96188

Item Status Contents

FAULT ON Card Fault


OFF Normal
SYNC ON Clock Synchronization Error or Loss of Signal
ERROR OFF Normal
RAI ON Receive Remote Alarm Indication Signal
OFF Normal
AIS ON Send Alarm Indication Signal
OFF Normal
SYNC FLASH Clock Master at External Clock Mode
ON Detection of Signal
OFF No Detection of Signal

2-C-28-17
(70695)
4.00 Parallel Connection of the Extensions
Any Single Line Telephone can be connected parallely with Proprietary Telephone as
follow:

To HLC card
Modular Panasonic KX-J66
or
T-Adaptor USOC RJA2X
2-conductor wiring cord

4-conductor
wiring cord

Proprietary Telephone Single Line Telephone

KX-T7020 KX-T61620
KX-T7030 KX-T61630
KX-T7050 KX-T61650
KX-T7130 KX-T123220
KX-T30820 KX-T123230
KX-T30830 KX-T123230D
KX-T30850 KX-T123235
KX-T123250

Note :
The 6-conductor wiring cord and the Modular T Adaptor KX-J36 are required when one of
the following PITS telephones is used for parallel connection. KX-T7130, KX-T123230D
and KX-T123235.

Not only a Single Line Telephone but an answering machine, a facsimile or a modem
(personal computer) can be connected parallely with certain PITS telephones.
Refer to Section 3-F-9.00 “Parallel Connection of Extensions” for further information.

2-C-29
5.00 Auxiliary Connection for Power Failure Transfer
Power Failure Transfer connects a specific Single Line and PITS telephones to selected
trunks in the event of system power failure.

The following PITS telephones can be used during power failure.


KX-T30830, KX-T61630, KX-T123230, KX-T123230D, KX-T123235

For further information about Power Failure Transfer, refer to Section 14-H-1.00 “Power
Failure Transfer Assignment.”
The Auxiliary Connection (see the illustration below) is required to implement this feature.

KX-T336 System changes the current connection to the Auxiliary connection


automatically when the power supply stops.
While the DC power is available by the backup batteries even if the AC power fails,
KX-T336 System does not change the current connection to the Auxiliary connection.
3 ports are available for KX-T96174X.

1) Connection

T3 T2 T 1 R1 R2 R3

T n : Tip
R n : Ring

(Modular plug)

Modular Jack 1

Modular Jack 2

Modular Jack 3

Central Office Line option card Extension option card


(LCOT, GCOT) (SLC, HLC)

• Insert the modular plugs of connection cords (6-conductor wiring) to the modular jacks of
Central Office Line option cards (LCOT, GCOT) and Extension option cards (SLC, HLC).

PLC card (Extension card) is not available with Power Failure Transfer.

2-C-30
(70695)
2) Connection of Central Office Line and Extensions

50-pin Connector 50-pin Connector

26 26
1 1
27 27
2 2
28 28
6 6
3 5 5 3
29 4
3
4
3 29
4 2
1
2
1
4
30 30
5 5
31 Modular Jack 1 31
6 6
32 32
7 7
33 33
8 8
34 34
9 9
35 35
10 10
36 36
11 11
37 6 6 37
5 5
12 4 4 12
38 3
2
3
2
38
13 1 1 13
39 39
14 14
40 Modular Jack 2 40
15 15
41 41
16 16
42 42
17 17
43 43
18 18
44 44
19 6 6 19
5 5
45 4 4 45
20 3
2
3
2
20
46 1 1 46
21 21
47 Modular Jack 3 47
22 22
48 48
23 23
49 49
24 24
50 50
25 25
Central Office Line cards Extension cards

2-C-31
6.00 Connection of the Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D)
1.
Front
Metal Plate 1) Drive the two small screws (accessory) on the
bottom of the unit.
Screw 2) Place the Metal Plate so that the screw heads
(Small) insert into the slots as shown.
Bottom
3) Slide the Metal Plate in the directions of the
arrows, and drive the screws.
Rear

2.
Insert Battery Adaptor into the Battery Adaptor
Compartment (Base Shelf).
Pull out the cords from the left side of the
Battery Adaptor.

3.
Slide the Metal Plate on Battery Adaptor
toward you and fix it to the Holder attached to
Base Shelf, as illustrated.

Holder

Metal Plate

2-C-32
4.
Connect the Battery Adaptor with two
automobile-type batteries (12V DC × 2) using
Battery Adaptor Line Cable as shown.
Make sure of the polarities of batteries and
wires.
Make sure do not short the batteries and
wires.
To connect the two batteries, use accessory
wire.

Automobile-type batteries Red (+)

12V DC
Accessory
Wire
12V DC

(A) (B) (C)


Blue (— )

(A) Ground Wire


(B) Battery Adaptor Cord
(C) Battery Adaptor Line Cable

5.
• Plug the Battery Adaptor cord to Backup Battery
connector on the Basic Shelf.
• Connect the Ground Wire of Battery Adaptor to
Ground Wire Connector on the Base Shelf.
Backup Battery
Connector

Power Unit

Ground Wire
Connector

2-C-33
6. When one or two Expansion Shelves (KX-T336200)
are installed, connect another Battery Adaptor (KX-
A26D) with automobile type batteries (12V DC × 2)
following the same procedures from 1 to 5.

Automobile type
batteries (24V DC)

Note :
Up to three pairs of automobile-type batteries can be connected to the KX-T336 System.
If power failure occurs, each pair of batteries supplies the power to each shelf (Basic,
Expansion 1, 2) connected respectively via Battery Adaptor (KX-A26D).

2-C-34
D. Connection of Optional
Peripheral Equipments

1.00 Paging Equipment


Up to two paging equipments (customer-supplied) can be connected to the system as
illustrated below.

Use an RCA connector.


• Output impedance: 600Ω

Speaker

Amplifier

Paging equipment 1

Speaker

Amplifier

TSW Card

Paging equipment 2

Paging jack 1

Paging jack 2

2-D-1
2.00 External Music Source (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Up to two external music sources (customer-supplied) can be connected to the system


as illustrated below.

Use a two-conductor plug


(9/64 inch in diameter)
• Input impedance 8Ω

TSW Card

EXT MUSIC Jack 1


EXT MUSIC Jack 2

2-D-2
(60395)
2.00 External Music Source (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

The KX-T336 System provides Music on Hold and Background Music. The KX-T336
System itself has music source (Internal Music Source), but External Music Source
(e.g.radio) can also be used by connecting it to the KX-T336 System. When you use
the External Music Source, the Music Source Selector Switch on the T-SW Card
should be set to “MUS 2” and when you use the Internal Music Source, the Music
Source Selector Switch should be set to “INT MUS.”

Use a two-conductor plug


(9/64 inch diameter)
• Input impedance
8Ω

T-SW Card

EXT MUSIC Jack 1


EXT MUSIC Jack 2

INT MUS

MUS 2

Music Source Selector Switch


INT MUS: Set when using the internal music
source.
MUS 2 : Set when using the external music
source.

• For the assignment of external Music Source 1 or 2, refer to 9-D-1.01 System-


Operation (1/3) and 9-F-2.00 Trunk-Pager & Music Source.
• If you use the internal music source, set 9-D-1.01 System-Operation (1/3),
External Music Source 1, 2 to “No, Yes.”

2-D-2-1
2-D-2(X)
(60395)
3.00 RS-232C Interface
The KX-T336 System provides two RS-232C interfaces.
These interfaces provide communication between the system and customer supplied
devices such as data terminals and line printers.
RS-232C Port 1 (PROG) is used for system programming, diagnostics and external
system database storage (Save/Load) functions, and Port 2 (SMDR) for Station
Message Detailed Recording (SMDR) only.

PROG

SMDR

2-D-3
1) Pin Configuration (“PROG”, “SMDR”)

Pin Circuit Type


Signal Name
Number EIA CCITT
1 FG Frame Ground AA 101
2 TXD Transmitted Data BA 103

3 RXD Received Data BB 104


4 RTS Request To Send CA 105

5 CTS Clear To Send CB 106


6 DSR Data Set Ready CC 107

7 SG Signal Ground AB 102


8 DCD Data Carrier CF 109
Detect

20 DTR Data Terminal CD 108.2


Ready

EIA (RS-232C) SIGNALS:


Frame Ground (FG); Data Set Ready (DSR); ............................(input)
Connects to the unit frame and the earth ground The ON condition of circuit DSR indicates the
conductor of the AC power cord. printer is ready. Circuit DSR ON does not
indicate that communication has been
Transmitted Data (TXD);........................(output) established with the printer.
Conveys signals from the unit to the printer. A
“Mark” condition is held unless data or BREAK Signal Ground (SG);
signals are being transmitted. Connects to the DC ground of the unit for all
interface signal.
Received Data (RXD);..............................(input)
Conveys signals from the printer. Data Terminal Ready (DTR)...................(output)
This signal line is turned ON by the unit to
Request To Send (RTS);........................(output) indicate that it is ON LINE. Circuit DTR ON does
This lead is held ON whenever DSR is ON. not indicate that communication has been
established with the printer. It is switched OFF
Clear To Send (CTS);............................... (input) when the unit is OFF LINE.
The ON condition of circuit CTS indicates that the
printer is ready to receive data from the unit. The Data Carrier Detect (DCD).......................(input)
unit does not attempt to transfer data or receive The ON condition is an indication to data terminal
data when circuit CTS is OFF. (DTE) that the carrier signal is being received.

2-D-4
3.01 Connection to the Printer

• Connect the RS-232C connector of the printer to “SMDR.”


• Cables must be shielded and the maximum cabling distance is 6.5 feet.

• Connection Chart

RS-232C (SMDR) port on the Basic Shelf (KX-T336100) RS-232C port on the printer

Circuit Type (EIA) Single Name Pin No. Pin No. Single Name Circuit Type (EIA)

AA FG 1 1 FG AA
BA TXD 2 3 RXD BB

BB RXD 3 2 TXD BA

CC DSR 6 20 DTR CD
AB SG 7 7 SG AB

CD DTR 20 5 CTS CB
6 DSR CC
8 DCD CF

2-D-5
3.02 Connection to the Data Terminal

Data Terminal

• Connect the RS-232C connector of the data terminal to the “PROG.”


• Cables must be shielded and the maximum length of the cable is 6.5 feet.

• Connection Chart

RS-232C port (PROG) on the Basic Shelf (KX-T336100) RS-232C port on the data terminal

Circuit Type (EIA) Single Name Pin No. Pin No. Single Name Circuit Type (EIA)

AA FG 1 1 FG AA

BB RXD 3 2 TXD BA

BA TXD 2 3 RXD BB

CB CTS 5 4 RTS CA

CA RTS 4 5 CTS CB

CD DTR 20 6 DSR CC

AB SG 7 7 SG AB

CC DSR 6 20 DTR CD

Panasonic data terminal ; KX-D4930, etc.


If you connect this unit to a Panasonic Data Terminal, the Communication Parameter
Transmit XON/XOFF on the Data Terminal must be set to “YES.”
For further details, see the Operating Instructions of the Data Terminal.

2-D-6
E. Installation of Attendant Console

1.00 Configuration

1) Front View

CRT unit

Handset

Base unit
Handset cord

Keyboard cord

Keyboard
(Option)

2) Rear View

AC power cord
Jack for attendant console
line cord.

Reset button

To AC outlet

2-E-1
(60395)
3) Left Side View

Power Switch

Jack for handset cord

4) Right Side View

Local switch

Ringer volume selector

Jack for handset cord Speaker volume control knob

2-E-2
2.00 Attendant Console Assembly

1)

CRT unit

Power indicator
Brightness adjustment
knob
CRT unit cord
Plug for connection
Handset
Plug for connecting the
CRT unit is connected
here.

Speaker Base unit

Handset cord

Keyboard cord
Keyboard (Option)

Name Quantity

CRT unit 1
Attendant Console Line cord
Base unit 1
(2-conductor wiring)
Handset 1

Handset cord 1

Attendant Console Line cord 1

Ferrite core 1 Ferrite core


Note: The illustration of Ferrite core may
Keyboard (Option) 1 vary slightly from the actual
product.
2-E-3
(E)
3.00 Handset Connection

Base unit

Jack Jack

Plug Plug Plug Plug


Handset cord Handset cord

1. Plug the coiled handset cord into the jack labeled “TO HANDSET” either right side or
left side of the base unit.
2. Plug the other end of the coiled cord into the handset, and then hang up.

❇ You can use either of the right and left jacks.

2-E-4
4.00 Installation and Removal of CRT Unit

4.01 CRT Unit Installation

1) Before connecting the CRT unit to the Base unit, be sure to attach the Ferrite core to the
CRT unit cord as shown in the figure below.

(Opening the Ferrite core)

(Attaching the Ferrite core to the CRT unit cord)

Ferrite core

Note: The illustration of Ferrite core may vary slightly from the actual product.
2) Plug the CRT unit cord into the connector (“CRT CONNECTOR”) on the base unit.

CRT unit
Plug

Connector

Ferrite core

Connect so that
the arrows face Base unit
each other.

2-E-5
(E)
3) Insert the two male components of the bottom front surface of the CRT unit to the two
female components at the top front surface of the base unit.

CRT unit

Male component

Female component
Ferrite core

Base unit

4) Set rear portion of the CRT unit slowly onto the base unit until the stop fixture holds the
CRT unit securely.

CRT unit

Base unit

2-E-6
4.02 CRT Unit Removal

❇ Confirm that the AC power cord has been removed.

Stop fixture

Press

1. Press the stop fixture toward you and hold it pressed, then lift up the rear portion
of the CRT unit.
2. Unplug the CRT unit cord from the base unit connector.

2-E-7
5.00 Keyboard Connection
1)

Plug
Jack

Plug

Keyboard (KX-T96145)
Base unit(bottom panel)

Insert the plug of the keyboard cord into the jack (“KEY BOARD CONNECTOR”)
on the base unit.
Cord clamper
2)

To disconnect the plug,


pull the plug while keeping
the hook pushed.
Hook

Fasten the keyboard plug securely with the cord clamper.

3)

Stand

• Stands are attached to the bottom of the keyboard so that the keyboard incline can
be adjusted.
Set the stands for maximum ease in key operation.

2-E-8
6.00 Connection with KX-T336 System

KX-T336 System

• Insert the modular plug of the attendant console line cord (2-conductor wiring) into the
modular jack (“TO AT LC”) on the base unit.

❇ For connection on the KX-T336 System side, see page 2-C-9.

2-E-9
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection (for U.S.A. and Canada)

❇ Connect the AC power cord only after all attendant console connections have been completed.

1)

To AC outlet (120V AC/60Hz).


AC power cord

• Insert the AC power cord into the AC outlet (120V AC/60Hz).

Attention!
• Hold the AC power cord plug to insert or remove the AC power cord.
• Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand.
• Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord, and do not leave it only partially inserted.
• When connecting the AC power cord, be sure to always establish ground wiring.

2)

Power switch

• Turn on the power switch.


(The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display.)

2-E-10
(60395)
7.00 AC Power Cord Connection (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

❇ Connect the AC power cord only after all attendant console connections have been completed.

1)

To AC outlet
AC power cord

❇ Before connecting the AC power cord, be


sure to check the Voltage Selector (115V/
200V/220V/240V) if it is set to your
household AC voltage. If not, reset the
Voltage Selector to the correct position with
a screwdriver.
If the plug of AC Power Cord does not fit
• Insert the AC power cord into the AC outlet. your electrical outlet, use the furnished plug
adaptor.
Attention!
• Hold the AC power cord plug to insert or remove the AC power cord.
• Do not insert or remove the AC power cord with a wet hand.
• Do not forcefully twist or pull on the AC power cord, and do not leave it only partially inserted.
• When connecting the AC power cord, be sure to always establish ground wiring.

2)

Power switch

• Turn on the power switch.


(The power indicator lights and the initial screen appears on the display.)

2-E-10-1
2-E-11(X)
(60395)
8.00 Various Adjustments

1) Display brightness adjustment

Brightness adjustment knob

• The brightness adjustment knob is used to adjust the brightness of the display.
Turn the knob to the right for increasing brightness until the proper brightness is
established.

2) SP-PHONE volume adjustment

• Volume control knob is used to adjust the volume level of the call through the SP-
PHONE. Adjust this volume for maximum ease in listening.

3) Ringer volume adjustment

• The ringer volume selector is used to adjust the ringer volume.


This selector can be switched among three stages: OFF, LOW and HIGH. Set for
the most appropriate volume.

2-E-12
2-E-11
F. Starting Up the KX-T336 System
1.00 System Power-Up Procedure
❇ Complete and check all installation procedures before connecting the AC power
cord (packaged separately).

1. First insert the AC power cord into the AC power cord connector on the back of the
base shelf as shown below.
2. Then insert the other end of the AC power cord into the AC outlet .
3. Turn on the Main Power Switch on the base shelf.
4. Turn on the power switch on the power unit of each shelf.
• The power indicator on the power unit will light.

Note :
Each shelf may be powered down individually, without powering down the entire
system.

2-F-1
(60395)
2.00 CPU Rotary-Switch Features

LED 1 (CPU failure)

LED 2 (Battery power down)

RESET button

Operation Switch 0 to 9 (MODE)

System Administration Device


Selection Switch: 0 to 9 (SYSTEM)

2.01 Operation Switch (MODE)


Switch Operation
With System Memory Without System Memory
No. Mode
Starts up the system with current system • System programming data is
programming data verified logically → on-line
0
• System programming data is not
verified logically → off-line
Starts up the system with current system Starts up the system with default
1
On-line programming data values
Starts up the system with current system Enters to off-line mode without
2 programming data initializing the data
(Power failure transfer status)
Special Operation
3
(Examination on the finished product)

4 Holds the current system programming data

Assigns default values automatically and “System Installation” screen is displayed


5
(Installation)
Off-line
Initializes the current system programming data and “System Installation” screen
6
is displayed (Installation)
Holds the current programming data and “System Installation” screen is displayed
7
(Enters to “Password Entry” screen compulsorily)
Reserved for future expansion
8 (Functions same as “0”)
Reserved for future expansion
9 (Functions same as “0”)

2-F-2
[Note]

a) When you start up the system after installation, the Operation Switch (MODE) should be set to “5” or
“6.”

• No.5 ....When you program the system data based on the factory programmed default values.
• No.6 ....When you program the system data without the factory programmed default values.

b) When system programming is finished, the Operation Switch (MODE) should be set to “0,” “1” or “2.”

• No.0 .....When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, the system enters to on-line mode if system programming data is verified logically, or
the system enters to off-line mode if system programming data is not verified logically.

• No.1 ....When CPU runway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, default value is loaded and the system enters to on-line mode.
If system programming data is not lost, reset-routine will be activated and enters to on-line
mode with the current system programming data.

• No.2 ....When CPU runaway occurs due to a loss of system programming data or the RESET button is
pressed, the system enters to off-line mode with the current System programming data.

c) With System Memory


System memory is provided.

d) Without System Memory


System memory is not provided.

e) Off-line
It is available to perform system data programming but call processing and functional test are not
available in off-line mode.

f) Power failure transfer


Connects preassigned CO lines and extensions directly, bypassing the system.

g) After you entered the system administration mode, keep the following considerations in mind when
setting the Operation Switch.

• No.5 ....Current programming data will be defaulted.


• No.6 ....Current programming data will be removed.

2-F-3
Operation Switch and Screen Display

Operation Backup Clock Setting Data On-line/Off-line Patterns of Screen


Switch Data Display (Below)

0 Without 3
1 8 On-line
Not assigned yet 3
3 9 With
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 3
Without Off-line
Already assigned 4
2
Not assigned yet 3
With On-line
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 3
4 ——
Already assigned 4
Not assigned yet 1
7 —— Off-line
Already assigned 2
5
—— 1
6

(Note) Once you exit the “System Installation” screen and “Date & Time Set Up” screen, these
screens are not displayed again.

Patterns of Screen Display

KX-T336
Pattern 1 System Installation Password Date & Time Main Menu

KX-T336
Pattern 2 Installation Password Main Menu
System

KX-T336
Pattern 3 Password Date & Time Main Menu
System

KX-T336
Pattern 4 Password Main Menu
System

2-F-4
2.02 System Administration Device Selection Switch (SYSTEM)

0 Pre-Programmed device is assigned


1 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
2 VT220 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
3 Dumb is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
4 ATT1 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
5 ATT2 is assigned as the System Administration Device compulsorily
6 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
7 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
8 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)
9 Reserved for future expansion (Functions same as “0”)

a) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “2” through “5,” System
Administration Device will be assigned compulsorily regardless of the system
programming. Default setting is VT220. (Refer to the table above)

b) If reset-routine is activated when this switch is set to “0,” “1,” or “6” through “9,” pre-
programmed device becomes valid as the System Administration Device.

It is possible to change the System Administration Device assignment compulsorily


by pressing the RESET button after selecting the desired switch position, if pre-
programmed System Administration Device is not available due to the hardware
troubles or something.

2-F-5
2.03 Operation Sequence for System Starting Up

START

Attendant Console
Administration
Device
RS-232C
4: ATT1
Connect the device to SYSTEM=4.5
5: ATT2
SIO#1 (upper side)

Dumb mode
Device mode
VT mode
SYSTEM=2 MODE=2

No
Default Values
Yes
MODE=5 MODE=6

Confirm device
assignment and Reset Power-on or
Rotary Switch press the RESET button

No Initial Screen
is displayed

Yes
Programming Off-line mode

When system data is destroyed, the


MODE switch system enters to off-line mode
selection
When system data is
destroyed, start up the
system with default
values
MODE=0 MODE=1 MODE=2

Press the RESET button

An error is detected
Programming
MODE : Operation Switch
Error ?
SYSTEM : System Administration Device
Selection Switch
No error
END On-line mode

2-F-6
(Example) The following flow chart shows the operation sequence for System
Starting Up with default values using Panasonic KX-D4930 in VT mode.

START

MODE=5
SYSTEM=2

Power ON reset or Press


the RESET button

Confirm the
Initial screen

MODE=0
SYSTEM=2

Press the RESET button

MODE : Operation Switch


SYSTEM : System Administration Device
END Selection Switch

* To start up the system using Panasonic KX-D4930 in Dumb mode, set


SYSTEM switch to “3” in above sequence.

2-F-7
Section 3

System Features and Operation


(Section 3)

System Features and Operation


Contents

Page
A Preparation ...................................................................................................... 3-A-1

B Basic Features................................................................................................. 3-B-1

1.00 Flexible Numbering................................................................................ 3-B-1


2.00 Directory Number (DN).......................................................................... 3-B-5
3.00 Floating Directory Number (FDN).......................................................... 3-B-6
4.00 Tenant Service....................................................................................... 3-B-7
5.00 Operator................................................................................................. 3-B-8
6.00 Class of Service (COS).......................................................................... 3-B-10
7.00 Group..................................................................................................... 3-B-11
7.01 Intercom Group............................................................................ 3-B-11
7.02 Call Pickup Group........................................................................ 3-B-12
7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD) Group........................................ 3-B-12
7.04 Paging Group.............................................................................. 3-B-13
7.05 Trunk Group ................................................................................ 3-B-13
8.00 Night Service ......................................................................................... 3-B-14
8.01 Directed Night Answer................................................................. 3-B-15
8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA).................................................... 3-B-16
8.03 Flexible Night Service.................................................................. 3-B-17
8.04 Fixed Night Service..................................................................... 3-B-17-1
8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode...................................................... 3-B-18
9.00 Mixed Station Capacities....................................................................... 3-B-19
10.00 Variable Time-Out.................................................................................. 3-B-20
11.00 Lockout.................................................................................................. 3-B-21
12.00 Automatic Station Release .................................................................... 3-B-21
13.00 Distinctive Dial Tone .............................................................................. 3-B-22
14.00 Distinctive Busy Tone............................................................................. 3-B-23
15.00 Confirmation Tone.................................................................................. 3-B-24
16.00 Tone and Ringing Patterns .................................................................... 3-B-25

C Outgoing Call Features.................................................................................... 3-C-1

1.00 Toll Restriction (for U.S.A. and Canada)................................................ 3-C-1


1.01 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................ 3-C-2
1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System...... 3-C-5
1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access............................................................................... 3-C-7
1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access.... 3-C-10
1.05 Operator/International Call Restriction ........................................ 3-C-13
1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction............................................................... 3-C-15
1.07 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction............................................................. 3-C-20
1.00 Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)..................... 3-C-20-1
1.08 Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access ................................ 3-C-20-2
1.09 Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access........................................................ 3-C-20-4

3-1
(60395)
Page
1.10 7 Digit Toll Restriction.................................................................. 3-C-20-6
1.11 Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System
(for New Zealand)........................................................................ 3-C-20-7
2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)......................................................... 3-C-21
2.01 ARS (for U.S.A. and canada)...................................................... 3-C-21
2.02 ARS (for New Zealand) ............................................................... 3-C-35-1
3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion ........................................................................ 3-C-36
4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion ................................................................... 3-C-37

D Receiving Features.......................................................................................... 3-D-1


1.00 Attendant Console (ATT) Operation ...................................................... 3-D-1
1.01 Load Sharing............................................................................... 3-D-2-1
1.02 Simultaneous Ringing.................................................................. 3-D-2-2
1.03 Interconsole IRNA....................................................................... 3-D-2-3
2.00 Attendant Console-less Operation ........................................................ 3-D-3
2.01 Direct In Line (DIL) ...................................................................... 3-D-3
2.02 Direct Inward System Access (DISA).......................................... 3-D-4
2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID).......................................................... 3-D-7
2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)-Day Service............... 3-D-8
2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-General..................................... 3-D-9
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with/without OGM..................... 3-D-11
2.07 Private CO (PCO)........................................................................ 3-D-15
2.08 Single CO (SCO)......................................................................... 3-D-16
2.09 Group CO (GCO)......................................................................... 3-D-17
2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment .................................................. 3-D-17-1
2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment........................................................... 3-D-17-3
3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment ................................................................ 3-D-18
3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment-No Ringing.................................... 3-D-18
3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing ........................... 3-D-18
4.00 Discriminating Ringing........................................................................... 3-D-19
5.00 Station Hunting ..................................................................................... 3-D-20
5.01 Station Hunting-Circular .............................................................. 3-D-20
5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal............................................................. 3-D-21

E Holding Features.............................................................................................. 3-E-1


1.00 Music on Hold (for U.S.A. and Canada) ............................................... 3-E-1
1.00 Music on Hold (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) .................... 3-E-1-1
2.00 Held Call Reminder................................................................................ 3-E-2
3.00 Transfer Recall ..................................................................................... 3-E-3

F Other Features................................................................................................. 3-F-1


1.00 Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR) .......................................... 3-F-1
2.00 Off Premise Extension (OPX)................................................................ 3-F-3
3.00 Walking Station...................................................................................... 3-F-3
4.00 Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing Back ...................... 3-F-5
5.00 Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)..................................................... 3-F-8
3-2
(70695)
Page
6.00 Rerouting............................................................................................... 3-F-9
7.00 Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection ....................................... 3-F-10
8.00 CO Busy Out.......................................................................................... 3-F-11
9.00 Parallel Connection of Extensions......................................................... 3-F-12
10.00 Voice Processing System (VPS)............................................................ 3-F-13
10.01 Voice Mail Integration................................................................ 3-F-15
10.02 DTMF-Tone Integration ............................................................. 3-F-21
11.00 Call Accounting Summary ..................................................................... 3-F-52
12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone................................................................. 3-F-62
13.00 Timed Reminder with OGM (Wake-up Call) .......................................... 3-F-64
14.00 TIE Lines................................................................................................ 3-F-67
14.01 Calling from TIE to TIE.............................................................. 3-F-72
14.02 Calling from TIE to CO .............................................................. 3-F-76
14.03 Calling from CO to TIE .............................................................. 3-F-79
14.04 Alternate Routing....................................................................... 3-F-81
14.05 TIE Caller ID Identification (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) ....... 3-F-84
15.00 T-1 Carrier.............................................................................................. 3-F-85
16.00 E-1 Carrier (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada) .......................... 3-F-87
17.00 Automatic Number Identification (ANI) .................................................. 3-F-90
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
18.00 Limited Call Duration ............................................................................. 3-F-92
19.00 Charge Management............................................................................. 3-F-93
(for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
19.01 Budget Management................................................................. 3-F-93
19.02 Charge Fee Reference.............................................................. 3-F-94

3-3
(70695)
A. Preparation
This section provides the basic information on
each of the system features which are
programmed at system level.
System features are those that affect the entire
operation of the system.
In this section, system features are divided into
the following five categories.

• Basic Features
• Outgoing Call Features
• Receiving Features
• Holding Features
• Other Features

3-A-1
B. Basic Features

1.00 Flexible Numbering


Description Conditions
This system comes with a variety of services, The followings are examples of feature number
and the feature numbers used when executing conflicts:
these services can be set as required. Examples: 2 and 21, 32 and 321, etc.
Feature numbers can be from one to four digits,
utilizing numbers “0” through “9” as well as “* ” Conversely, the following numbers can be used
and “#.” without conflict:
Examples: 2 and 3, 3 and 41, 41 and 42, 450
Directory Numbers (DN) can be three or four and 451, etc.
digits in length, and it is acceptable for some to
have three digits and others four digits. “* ” and “#” cannot be used for extension
When three-digit DN's are used, any number can numbers (extension blocks).
be set as the initial digit; when four-digit DN's are
used, any numbers can be set as the initial two When “* ” and “#” are included in a feature
digits. number, it will not be possible to execute the
corresponding feature using a dial pulse type of
The feature numbers are set in the “System- Single Line Telephone (SLT).
Numbering Plan” screens.
Two default parameters sets are provided for the Only “0”, “1” to “9”, “* ” and “#” are valid for
feature numbers and when either is used in its entering feature numbers into One Touch dial
original form, the Numbering Plan option in the buttons.
“System-Operation” screen is set to “Fixed 1” or When “FLASH”, “-” ,“PAUSE” and “SECRET” are
“Fixed 2.” included into feature numbers, reorder tone is
sent and the features cannot be executed.
In this case, the settings cannot be changed in
the “System-Numbering Plan” screen. When a “#” cannot be used for the feature numbers listed
feature number is to be changed, select Flex in below, for those features require “#” as a
the “System-Operation”, Numbering Plan before delimiter when setting the feature:
making the change in the “System-Numbering
Plan.” “Call Forwarding-to Trunk”
“Pickup Dialing Programming”
Programming “Speed Dialing-Station”
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb The feature numbers which have been set in the
“System-Numbering Plan” screens can be used
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Numbering Plan when dial tone is heard. However, feature
“System-Numbering Plan” 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00 number for “Account Code” may be used at times
to 6.09 other than when dial tone is heard.

3-B-1
In addition to the feature numbers which can be
set in “System-Numbering Plan,” fixed feature
numbers are provided and these are shown in
the following table.

Fixed Feature Numbers

Function Number

While busy tone is heard


Call-back (for extensions only) 6
Busy Override 1

While Do Not Disturb tone is heard


DND Override 1

When handset is on-hook (PITS only)


Time display/date display switching *
Background music on/off 1
Day/Night mode display #

While talking to doorphone


Open the door 5

Others
Extension time and data display mode
switching *
Account code delimiter #
Account code delimiter (for dial pulse type 99
SLT only)
Account code re-input *

• The feature numbers which are set in the


“System-Numbering Plan” are listed on the
following pages.

3-B-2
Flexible Feature Numbers

Function Default
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
1st Hundred Block Extension 1 1
2nd Hundred Block Extension 2 2
3rd Hundred Block Extension 3 3
4th Hundred Block Extension — —
5th Hundred Block Extension — —
6th Hundred Block Extension — —
7th Hundred Block Extension — —
8th Hundred Block Extension — —
9th Hundred Block Extension — —
10th Hundred Block Extension — —
11th Hundred Block Extension — —
12h Hundred Block Extension — —
13th Hundred Block Extension — —
14th Hundred Block Extension — —
15th Hundred Block Extension — —
16th Hundred Block Extension — —
Operator Call (General) 0 0
Operator Call (Specific) — —
ARS/Local CO Line Access 9 9
Trunk Group 01-08 Access 81 81
Trunk Group 09-16 Access 82 82
Trunk Group 17-24 Access * 83 83
Speed Dialing - System 1 6 1
Speed Dialing - Station 2 6 2
Doorphone Call (1-4) 40 640
External Paging 41 641
Station Paging 42 642
External Paging Answer 43 643
Station Paging Answer 44 644
Night Answer 1 45 645
Night Answer 2 46 646
Dial Call Pickup 47 647
Directed Call Pickup 48 648
Hold Extension Retrieve 49 649
Redial 3 6 3
External Feature Access 50 650
Account Code # #
Hold 51 651
Hold Retrieve 52 652
Call Park-System 53 653
Call Park Retrieve - System 54 654
Call Park - Station 55 655
Call Park Retrieve - Station 56 656
Call Forwarding - All Call Set 2 2
Call Forwarding - Busy Set 3 3
Call Forwarding - No Answer Set 4 4
Call Forwarding - to Trunk 5 5
Call Forwarding - Busy/No Answer 6 6
Do Not Disturb Set 1 1
Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel ##0 ##0
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 61 61
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 61# 61#
* (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)
3-B-3
(70695)
Flexible Feature Numbers

Function Default
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Call Waiting Set 62 62
Call Waiting Cancel 62# 62#
BSS/OHCA Deny Set 63 63
BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel 63# 63#
Busy Override Deny Set 64 64
Busy Override Deny Cancel 64# 64#
Data Line Security Set 65 65
Data Line Security Cancel 65# 65#
Pickup Dialing Programming 660 660
Pickup Dialing Set 66 66
Pickup Dialing Cancel 66# 66#
Absent Message Set 4 6 4
Absent Message Cancel #4 6#4
Timed Reminder Confirm 50 50
Timed Reminder Set 51 51
Timed Reminder Cancel #5 #50
Voice Calling Mode Set 67 67
Voice Calling Mode Cancel 67# 67#
Voice Calling Deny Set 68 68
Voice Calling Deny Cancel 68# 68#
Speed Dialing - Station Programming 6 6 5
Station Lock Set 6 6 6
Station Lock Cancel #6 6#6
Walking COS Set 7 6 7
Walking COS Cancel #7 6#7
Walking Station Set 8 6 8
Walking Station Cancel #8 6#8
Message Set 9 6 9
Message Cancel #9 6#9
Station Program Clear ### ###
Message Waiting Reply 57 657
TIE Trunk Access 84 7
Night Mode Set 70 69
Night Mode Cancel 70# 69#
Night Service Manual Mode Set 71 51
Night Service Manual Mode Cancel 71# 51#
Flexible Night Service 72 520
Remote Station Lock Set 73 53
Remote Station Lock Cancel 73# 53#
Remote DND Set 74 54
Remote DND Cancel 74# 54#
Remote FWD Cancel 75 675
Remote FWD Cancel - One Time 76 676
BGM Through External Pager 77 677
Busy Out Trunk 78 57
Unbusy Trunk 78# 57#
OGM Record 791 691
OGM Playback 792 692
UCD Log In 0 6 0
UCD Log Out #0 6#0
Remote Timed Reminder Confirm 7 0 5 0
Remote Timed Reminder Set 7 1 5 1
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel 7# 50#
3-B-4
(70695)
Flexible Feature Numbers

Default
Function
Fixed 1 Fixed 2
Call Forwarding - Follow Me Set 7 7
Call Forwarding - Follow Me Cancel 8 8
Other PBX Extension 01 — —
Other PBX Extension 02 — —
Other PBX Extension 03 — —
Other PBX Extension 04 — —
Other PBX Extension 05 — —
Other PBX Extension 06 — —
Other PBX Extension 07 — —
Other PBX Extension 08 — —
Other PBX Extension 09 — —
Other PBX Extension 10 — —
Other PBX Extension 11 — —
Other PBX Extension 12 — —
Other PBX Extension 13 — —
Other PBX Extension 14 — —
Other PBX Extension 15 — —
Other PBX Extension 16 — —
Transfer 58 58
Conference 59 59

3-B-4-1
(70695)
2.00 Directory Number (DN)
Description <Example>
Directory numbers are the software type logical System-Numbering Plan
numbers which are programmed to match the
Numbering Plan (01/11)
hardware type physical numbers (port numbers)
attached to ports of extensions. No. Feature DG1 DG2 DG3 DG4
Accordingly, directory numbers are extension 1 1st Hundred Block Extension 5 - -
numbers.
2 2nd Hundred Block Extension 6 - -
Directory numbers are assigned in “Configuration- 3 3rd Hundred Block Extension 7 0 - -
DN Assignment” to be three or four digits.
4 4th Hundred Block Extension 8 0 - -
Only numeric characters “0 to 9” can be used as a
Directory Number.
DNs from 8000 to 8099 are assignable.
Directory number setting follows the setting in DNs from 7000 to 7099 are assignable.
“System-Numbering Plan”, 1st Hundred Block
DNs from 600 to 699 are assignable.
Extension through 16th Hundred Block Extension.
DNs from 500 to 599 are assignable.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Configuration-DN Assignment” 9-C-3.00 10-C-3.00


“System-Numbering Plan”, 9-D-6.01 10-C-10.00
1st Hundred Block Extension 9-D-6.02



16th Hundred Block Extension

Conditions
There are two types of directory numbers: the
Primary Directory Number (PDN) and the
Secondary Directory Number (SDN).
For further details of PDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.01
“PDN Button.” For SDN, refer to Section 4-B-3.02
“SDN Button.”

If you assign only one digit in “System-Numbering


Plan”, 1st Hundred Block Extension through 16th
Hundred Block Extension, you can assign three-
digit DNs which start with the pre-assigned digit in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

If you assign leading two digits in “System-


Numbering Plan,” you can assign four-digit DNs
which start with the pre-assigned two digits in
“Configuration-DN Assignment.”

3-B-5
(70695)
3.00 Floating Directory Number
(FDN)
Description Conditions
It is possible to assign virtual directory numbers FDN setting must follow the assignment of
to resources and make them appear to be “System-Numbering Plan”, 1st Hundred Block
extensions. Those directory numbers are Extension through 16th Hundred Block
defined as Floating Directory Numbers (FDN). Extension, as well as DN setting.

For example, if an operator receives an incoming


CO call for Remote Administration, the operator
can transfer the call to Remote Administration
resource using the FDN, in the same way as if
the operator transfers an incoming CO call to an
extension, that is, if the operator is PITS, by
pressing the TRANSFER button and dialing the
FDN.

FDN can be assigned to the following:

1. Pilot number for UCD groups 01 to 32


2. General Operator Call (two FDN's can be
programmed)
3. Attendant Console number (ATT1, ATT2)
4. Remote Administration resource

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Special Attended-UCD (1/2)”, 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00


FDN
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
FDN for General Operator Call
“System-Operation (2/3)”, 9-D-1.02
Remote Directory Number
“Extension-Attendant Console 9-G-4.01 10-C-28.00
(1/2)”, DN

3-B-6
4.00 Tenant Service
Description
A single system can be used as if two systems To enable Tenant Service, set “System-
were available. Operation”, Tenant Service to “Yes.”
This enables the configuration of two systems “System-Tenant”, programming is used to
which, in each case, are suited to a different determine how the resources will be divided up
customer. between the tenants.

System Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Tenant 1 Tenant 2
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
(Customer 1) (Customer 2) Tenant Service
“System-Tenant” 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00

Some of resources can be divided up between


the tenants and others are used in common. Conditions
A list of resources in each classification is given The Night Mode can be operated separately for
below. each tenant.

[Resources which can be divided up] Calling to extensions in the other tenant can be
• Trunk Groups enabled by setting “System-Tenant”, Inter-Tenant
• Attendant Consoles Calling to “Yes.”
• Extensions However, even when this function has been set
• Direct Inward System Access (DISA) to “Yes,” it is not possible to call the Attendant
• Automatic Gain Control (AGC) Console in the other tenant.
• Number of Speed Dialing-System
• External pagers
• Doorphones
• Background Music or Music on Hold
• Number of Call Park-System parking zones
• Number of Flexible Absent Messages
• Number of possible Message Waiting
entries
• Passwords (Walking COS, PITS System
Programming)

[Common resources]
• Station Message Detail Recording (SMDR)
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
• Numbering Plan
• Remote operation control
• Class of Service (COS)
• Administration Device
• Toll restriction tables

3-B-7
5.00 Operator
Description
The system allows the operator to answer, (When one attendant console is connected)
monitor and control the incoming calls.
Operator 1 ATT ATT
Up to two operators (operator 1 and 2) can be
or
assigned in the system.
Operator 2 extension
The Operator 1 and 2 can perform several
special functions listed in the table below.
If tenant service is employed, up to two operators (When two attendant consoles are connected)
can be assigned to each tenant individually.
Not only the ATT (attendant console) operator but Operator 1 ATT
the extension user can be assigned as an
operator. Operator 2 ATT
“Operator 1” must always be selected when only
one operator is assigned.
The operator assignment can be done in the
If an attendant console is connected to the
system programming “System-Operation (3/3),”
system, the operator assignment should be
Operator 1 and Operator 2.
arranged as follows.

Special functions available with each operator.

Operator 1 Operator 1 Operator 2


Feature (ATT) (Extension) (ATT or
Extension)
1 Change Night/Day Mode
2 Change Night/Day Switching Mode (Auto/Man)
3 Set Destination in the Night Mode
(Only for Flexible Night Answer Trunk)
4 Pickup Group Station Lock/Unlock
5 Electronic Station Lock Out/Unlock (to Other Stations)
6 DND Set/Cancel (to Other Stations)
7 FWD Cancel (to Other Stations)
8 One-time FWD Cancel (to Other Stations)
9 External BGM On/Off
10 Manual Trunk Busy-Out Setting
11 CO Access Control
12 OGM Record/Playback
13 Transfer to Internal Modem * 1
(For Remote Maintenance)
14 Local Alarm Indication
15 Remote Timed Reminder *2 *2

* 1 Available with any extension user from software version 9.XX and above. : available
* 2 In case of an extension, only a PITS with display is available. : not available

3-B-8
(50195)
Programming • Invalid Operator Assignment
Reference The following arrangement is invalid in the
System Programming
VT Dumb operator assignment whether tenant service is
employed or not.
“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-5.00
Operator 1
Operator 2 Operator 1 — — extension
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) Operator 2 ATT extension ATT
Operator 2 (Tenant 2)

Conditions • Operator Call


The extension user can call the operator in the
• Tenant Service system by dialing the feature number for
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 and “Operator Call (General)” or “Operator Call
2) can have unique operator assignment (Specific).”
individually, that is, up to four operators can be For further information, refer to the following:
assigned to the system. (PITS users)
In this case, the operator assignment should be Section 4-C-10.00 “Operator Call”
arranged as follows.
(SLT users)
Tenant 1 Tenant 2 Section 5-A-8.00 “Operator Call.”

Operator 1 ATT ATT • Transfer


The extension user can transfer a call to the
Operator 2 extension extension operators (Attendant Console or Extension) by
both screened and unscreened call transfers.
or For further information, refer to the following.

Operator 1 ATT extension (PITS users)


Section 4-F-1.01 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Operator 2 ATT extension Station”
Section 4-F-1.02 “Screened Call Transfer to
or Station”
Section 4-F-1.06 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Attendant Console”
Operator 1 ATT extension
(SLT users)
Operator 2 Section 5-D-1.01 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
Station”
Section 5-D-1.02 “Screened Call Transfer to
The operator assignment can be done in the Station”
system programming as follows. Section 5-D-1.04 “Unscreened Call Transfer to
(Tenant 1) Attendant Console”
“System-Operation (3/3)”, Operator 1 and
Operator 2. • Hold
(Tenant 2) The extension user cannot hold a call with an
“System-Tenant”, Operator 1 and Operator 2. attendant console operator.

3-B-9
(30393)
6.00 Class of Service (COS)
Description 16) Trunk groups available for an outgoing CO
call when the outgoing call is made by
The functions executed by the extensions users
specifying a trunk group. This setting is not
can be restricted by the COS No. assigned for
valid for one-touch CO line outgoing calls,
each extension user.
outgoing calls by specifying a Virtual Trunk
A total of 32 classes of service are available.
Group, and local CO line outgoing calls
A Class of Service is assigned to every extension
including Automatic Route Selection calls.
in “Extension-Station”, Class of Service. The
17) Special carrier access-enable/disable
available options are set in “System-Class of
(Setting of accessible carrier when outgoing
Service”.
calls are made by specifying Virtual Trunk
Group)
Programming
18) Setting of accessible paging group with
Reference station paging
System Programming
VT Dumb 19) Setting of accessible external pager with
“System-Class of Service” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
external paging
9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
“Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Class of Service

Conditions
A list of the items which can be set in "System-
Class of Service" are given below:

1) Outgoing call restriction level (Day mode)


2) Outgoing call restriction level (Night mode)
3) Maximum number of digits allowed for a CO
call
4) The ability to allow or deny Call Forwarding
and Do Not Disturb
5) The ability to override Do Not Disturb of the
called station
6) The ability to forward or transfer a call to an
outside party.
7) Forced account code operation-enable/disable
8) BSS/OHCA override operation-enable/disable
9) BSS/OHCA deny-enable/disable
10) Executive Busy Override of called party-
enable/disable
11) Executive Busy Override deny-enable/disable
12) Electronic Station Lock Out/Walking COS-
enable/disable
13) Walking Station-enable/disable
14) The ability to perform PITS System
Programming-enable/disable
15) ARS/Local toll restriction-with restriction/no
restriction/no access

3-B-10
7.00 Group
7.01 Intercom Group
Description Conditions
Each extension is assigned to an intercom group If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
(1 to 8). The extension users in the same intercom each intercom group is determined by the
group can call each other by dialing the intercom programming in “Group-ICM/Paging Group”
number (one or two digits) using ICM button on a screen.
PITS telephone. It is also possible to make an
intercom call by dialing “*” and the directory There is no limit on the number of extensions that
number (three or four digits). each Intercom Group can include, but an
Refer to Section 4-C-5.02 “Intercom Calling” for extension user can be assigned to only one
further information. Intercom Group.

The intercom group affiliation of each extension Intercom numbers are composed of one or two
user is determined in the “Extension-Station”, ICM digits. This means that there are a maximum of
Group and the intercom numbers are set by 100 intercom numbers (00 through 99) per
“Extension-Station”, Intercom Number. intercom group.
All extensions (PITS and SLT) must belong to one Extensions belonging to different intercom
of eight intercom groups. groups can have the same intercom number.

Since intercom numbers cannot be given to SLT, it


is only possible to call these telephones by using
their directory numbers. Also, since SLTs are not
provided with ICM buttons they can only call PITS
using the directory numbers.

The relationship between intercom groups and


paging groups is determined by programming the
“Group-Call Pickup Group” screen.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00


“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
ICM
“Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Intercom Number
ICM Group

3-B-11
(50195)
7.02 Call Pickup Group 7.03 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)
Description Group
Extensions belonging to a particular intercom Description
group can be divided into call pickup groups It is possible to execute UCD functions in a group
which can execute the Dial Call Pickup feature. composed of one or more Call Pickup Groups.
The call pickup group belonging to an intercom Such a group is called a UCD group.
group is set by programming in the “Group-Call The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen
Pickup Group”, ICM. determines which pickup group(s) will be in the
UCD group.
Up to 32 call pickup groups can be assigned in Up to 32 UCD groups can be assigned in the
the system. system.
Extensions programmed into call pickup groups The UCD group and the call pickup group
are set in the “Extension-Station”, Pickup Group. configuring the UCD group must belong to the
It is not necessary for all extensions to be in a same intercom group.
pickup group. See Section 3-D-2.05 “Uniform Call Distribution
See Section 4-D-3.01 “Dial Call Pickup” for (UCD)-without OGM” and Section 3-D-2.06
further information about the Dial Call Pickup “Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-with OGM” for
feature. further information about the UCD functions.
See the previous Section 3-B-7.02 “Call Pickup
Programming Group” for details on Call Pickup Groups.
Reference See Section 3-B-7.01 “Intercom Group” for
System Programming
VT Dumb further information about ICM Groups.
“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
ICM Programming
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00 Reference
Pickup Group System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00


UCD
Conditions
Different call pickup groups can have the same
UCD and/or paging groups. Conditions
None
See Section 3-B-7.04 “Paging Group” for details
on Paging Groups.
See the following Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD) Group” for details on UCD
Groups.

3-B-12
7.04 Paging Group 7.05 Trunk Group
Description Description
It is possible to execute paging functions in a To support efficient utilization of trunks, they can
group composed of one or more pickup groups. be grouped together (up to 16 groups) if all
Such a group is called a “Paging Group.” trunks in the group perform the same function.
The following six kinds of trunk groups can be
Up to eight paging groups can be assigned in the assigned in the system.
system. The items listed below are set in the “Group-
When Tenant Service is employed, the “Group- Trunk Group” screen.
ICM/Paging Group” screen sets which tenant the
paging group belongs to. (a) Trunk group type
The “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen sets (b) Trunk group name
which pickup group(s) make up a paging group. (c) Tenant selection
(d) Trunk group direction
Programming (e) Incoming destination (Day)
Reference
(f) Incoming destination (Night)
System Programming (g) Intercept Routing (Day)
VT Dumb
(h) Intercept Routing (Night)
“Group-ICM/Paging Group”, 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00 (i) Toll restriction level
Paging Group-Tenant (j) Toll restriction table
“Group-Call Pickup Group”, 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
(k) Dialing plan selection
PAG
(l) Disconnect time selection
(m) Pause time selection
(n) Hookswitch flash time selection
Conditions
(o) DID digit modification table selection
If tenant service is employed, pickup groups (p) Entry of PBX access code (No restriction)
which can be used to configure a paging group (q) Entry of PBX access code (Restriction)
are limited within the same tenant. (r) Restriction time on CO-CO calls
See Section 4-H-1.00 “Paging” for further (s) DIL (I:N) destination
information about paging features. (t) Maximum number of digits after External
Feature Access
(u) CO-TIE Restriction
(v) TIE-CO Restriction
(w) TIE Forced Account Mode
(x) TIE Incoming Delete Digit
(y) TIE Incoming Insert Dial

The “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group determines


which trunk group the CO line belongs to.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00

Conditions
A single CO line cannot belong to more than one
trunk group.

3-B-13
(70695)
8.00 Night Service
Description
Special arrangements are required to handle 2. Treatment of other calls in night mode
attendant-seeking incoming CO calls during period
DID and PCO calls are not assignable to Night
when the operator at Attendant Console is not
Service.
available, for example at night and on weekends.
A DID call will ring at the appropriate extension
Attendant-seeking incoming CO calls will be
and PCO call will ring at designated extension
redirected to the designated extension and/or a
regardless of Day/Night mode.
group of extensions (Directed Night Answer)or will
ring an external pager (Universal Night Answer) in The following list shows the relationship
night mode. between Incoming Mode (Day) and assignable
Incoming Mode (Night) of the Trunk Group.
1. Treatment of attendant-seeking incoming CO
Incoming Mode (Day) Incoming Mode (Night)
calls in night mode
ATT FIXED
(Directed Night Answer)
FLEXIBLE
Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO DISA
calls to the designated extension or a group of
extensions automatically in night mode.
Incoming Mode (Day) Incoming Mode (Night)
(Universal Night Answer (UNA))
Allows any extension user in the system to DISA Day Mode
answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls FIXED
DIL 1: 1
ringing at an external pager, by dialing the FLEXIBLE
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.” DIL 1: N DISA

Note:Incoming attendant-seeking CO calls can TAFAS (1/2)


be redirected to the Remote Maintenance
Resource for the System Administration. To continue the same Incoming Mode for a
trunk group both in Day and Night, set
Night Answer Destination can be administered “Incoming Mode (Night)” to Day Mode.
either by fixed mode (Fixed Night Service) or
flexible mode (Flexible Night Service). (Note)
If Incoming Mode (Day) of a trunk group is set
(Flexible Night Service) to ATT, Day Mode can not be selected for
Allows the Operator 1 to change the pre- Incoming Mode (Night).
assigned night answer destination.
(Fixed Night Service) The following calls directed to the Attendant
The Operator 1 cannot change the pre-assigned Console in day mode can be redirected to the
night answer destination. designated extension in night mode.
Only the system administrator can change the DPH, DID, DISA and Extension calls
pre-assigned night answer destination.
To utilize this redirection, assign desired
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service extension number in “Extension-Attendant
is almost the same. Console” Night.
The difference is:

Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console


or Extension) can change the night
answer destination.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as
the destination of one or more CO
lines in night mode

3-B-14
(30393)
8.01 Directed Night Answer
3. Switching of Day/Night Mode Description
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either Used to redirect incoming attendant-seeking CO
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually calls to the designated extension or a group of
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or extensions (Night Answer Group) automatically in
Extension User) at any time desired. night mode.
(Automatic Switching) To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
The system will switch the day and night modes Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
at the programmed time automatically each day. and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to EXT:
xxxx or NAG (Night Answer Group).
(Manual Switching)
Operator 1 can switch the Day/Night mode at
desired time. Night Answer Group
A single group of extensions (called the Night
(Supplement)
Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at
The following programming items may be night.
assigned in a different way between day mode Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at
and night mode. this group.
• “System-Class of Service” The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.
Toll Restriction Level (Day)
Toll Restriction Level (Night) CO1 CO2 CO3
(Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of
Service (1/2).”)
• “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Day) Night Answer Group
Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
(Refer to Section 9-E-1.01 “Trunk Group To utilize this feature, program as follows.
(1/2).”) 1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
• “Extension-Station” (Night) to “FIXED.”
Day Ring 2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
Night Ring “NAG.”
(Refer to Section 9-G-1.02 “Station (2/3).”) This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.
3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions
by using NAG command.

3-B-15
(30393)
8.02 Universal Night Answer (UNA)
Programming Description
Reference Allows any extension user in the system to
System Programming
VT Dumb answer incoming attendant-seeking CO calls
ringing at an external pager, by dialing the
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
feature number for “Night Answer 1 or 2.”
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00 To activate this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Night Answer Point Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED or FLEXIBLE
“Night Answer Group (NAG)” — 10-C-59.00
and “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to UNA
1 or UNA 2. UNA 1 is associated with External
Conditions Pager 1 and UNA 2 is associated with External
Pager 2. All CO lines belonging to this trunk
1. IRNA and Rerouting group are covered by this assignment.
If an incoming CO call directed to a single
extension is not answered within a specified External pager must be connected to the system
time period, the caller will receive Rerouting beforehand.
or IRNA treatment. Up to two external pagers can be connected to
For further information, refer to Section 3-F- the system.
5.00 “Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA)” To answer calls ringing at external pager 1, dial
and Section 3-F-6.00 “Rerouting.” the feature number for “Night Answer 1,” and to
answer calls ringing at external pager 2, dial the
2. Remote Administration feature number for “Night Answer 2.”
To execute the system administration from a For further information about external pager
remote location at night, select “RMT” for assignment, refer to Section 4-H-1.03 “Paging
“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point External Pagers.”
assignment.
For further information about remote Programming
administration, refer to section 14-B-2.00
“System Administration from a Remote Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Location.”
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
3. Tenant Service Incoming Mode (Night)
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
and 2) can have unique Night Service Night Answer Point
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
arrangement individually.
(03/11)”,
In this case, Night Service assignment for
Night Answer 1
tenant 1 is determined by the system Night Answer 2
programming “System-Operation” and Night
Service assignment for tenant 2 is determined
by the system programming “System-Tenant.”

3-B-16
(70695)
8.03 Flexible Night Service
Conditions Description
1. UNA and TAFAS Flexible Night Service allows the Operator 1
Call handling in UNA is identical to TAFAS. (Attendant Console or Extension user) to change
The difference is that TAFAS is available in the assigned night answer destination on a CO
day mode and UNA is available in night line basis by dialing the feature number for
mode. “Flexible Night Service.”
For further information about TAFAS, refer to
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Section 4-D-4.00 “Trunk Answer From Any
Incoming Mode (Night) to FLEXIBLE. All CO
Station (TAFAS)-Day Service.”
lines which belong to this trunk group are
covered by this assignment.
2. IRNA and Rerouting
If FIXED is selected for the above setting, the
If incoming CO calls are not answered for any
assigned night answer destination can not be
reason within a specified time period, the
changed by the Operator 1.
caller will receive Rerouting or IRNA
treatment. Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service
For further information, refer to section 3-F- is almost the same.
6.00 “Rerouting” and Section 3-F-5.00 The difference is:
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console
3. Remote Administration or Extension) can change the night
To execute the system administration from a answer destination.
remote location at night, select “RMT” for
“Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point Fixed A group of extensions (Night
assignment. Answer Group) can be assigned as
For further information about remote the destination of one or more CO
administration, refer to Section 14-B-2.00 lines in night mode
“System Administration from a Remote
Location.”
Programming
4. Tenant Service Reference
System Programming
If tenant service is employed, each tenant (1 VT Dumb
and 2) can have a unique Night Service
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
arrangement individually. Incoming Mode (Night)
The affiliation of each external pager is “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
determined by the system programming in Night Answer Point
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External “System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
Pager- Tenant. (08/11)”, Flexible Night Service
Extension users cannot answer the UNA calls
ringing at an external pager in the different
tenant. Conditions
Tenant Service
Operation If tenant service is employed, the night answer
Refer to the following: destination for a CO line can only be changed by
the Operator 1 in the same tenant.
(PITS) Section 4-I-1.01 “Universal Night
Answer (UNA)” Operation
(SLT) Section 5-G-1.01 “Universal Night For the operation of changing the Night Answer
Answer (UNA)” destination, refer to the following:
(PITS) Section 4-I-1.02 “Flexible Night Service”
(SLT) Section 5-G-1.02 “Flexible Night Service”
(ATT) Section 6-J-1.01 “Flexible Night Service”

3-B-17
(70695)
8.04 Fixed Night Service
Description Programming
Call handling in Flexible and Fixed night service is Reference
System Programming
almost the same. VT Dumb

The difference is: “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Night)
Flexible The Operator 1 (Attendant Console “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
or Extension) can change the night Night Answer Point
“Night Answer Group (NAG)” — 10-C-59.00
answer destination.
Fixed A group of extensions (Night
Answer Group) can be assigned as Conditions
the destination of one or more CO
None
lines in night mode
Operation
If FIXED is selected, the assigned night answer None
destination can not be changed by the Operator 1.
To utilize this feature, set “Group-Trunk Group”
Incoming Mode (Night) to “FIXED.” All CO lines
belong to this trunk group are covered by this
assignment.

Night Answer Group


A single group of extensions (called the Night
Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at
night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at
this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.

CO1 CO2 CO3

Night Answer Group

To utilize this feature, program as follows.


1. Assign “Group-Trunk Group” Incoming Mode
(Night) to “FIXED.”
2. Assign “Trunk-CO Line” Night Answer Point to
“NAG.”
This CO line must belong to the Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is assigned to
FIXED.
3. Assign the DN of the destination extensions by
using NAG command.

3-B-17-1
(30393)
8.05 Switching of Day/Night Mode
Description Conditions
It is assignable to switch Day/Night mode either If Auto Start Time on a certain day is not
automatically at pre-assigned time or manually assigned, the current mode is continued until a
by the Operator 1 (Attendant Console or new start time is encountered.
Extension) at any time desired.
If Manual Switching mode is assigned, the If the Start Time for Day mode and Night mode
Operator 1 must dial the feature number for on the same day are set identically, the current
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Night Mode mode is continued.
Cancel” for day service.
If Auto Switching mode is assigned, the system If Auto Start Time assignment is not programmed
will switch the day and night modes at the at all, the current mode is continued. In other
programmed time each day. words if the current mode is Day then Day Mode
is continued, and if the current mode is Night
To utilize Auto Switching mode, set “System- then Night Mode is continued.
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Auto” and
assign desired mode switching time to “Auto Operation
Start Time” on a per day of the week basis. Refer to the following:
To utilize Manual Switching mode, set “System-
Operation (3/3)” Night Service to “Manual.” (PITS) Section 4-I-1.03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode”
The Operator 1, however, can override the Auto (SLT) Section 5-G-1.03 “Switching of Day/Night
Mode setting, that is Manual Mode can be Mode”
established, by dialing the feature number for (ATT) Section 6-J-1.02 “Switching of Day/Night
“Night Service Manual Mode Set.” To restore the Mode”
Auto mode, the Operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”

If tenant service is employed, night service


assignment unique to each tenant (Tenant 1 and
Tenant 2) can be programmed individually.
The assignment in “System-Operation (3/3)” is
applied to Tenant 1 and the assignment in
“System-Tenant” is applied to Tenant 2.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (3/3)”, 9-D-1.03 10-C-4.00


Night Service
Auto Start Time
“System-Tenant”, 9-D-2.00 10-C-5.00
Night Service (Tenant 2)
Auto Start Time
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.08 10-C-10.00
(08/11)”,
Night Mode Set
Night Mode Cancel
Night Service Manual Mode
Set
Night Service Manual Mode
Cancel

3-B-18
(70695)
9.00 Mixed Station Capacities
Description Programming
The KX-T336 System supports a wide range of Reference
System Programming
telephone sets, not only PITS (Proprietary VT Dumb
Integrated Telephone System) telephones but “Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
also Standard Rotary telephones (10 pps/20 pps)
and Standard Push-button telephones.
Conditions
The PITS telephones can be categorized as
follows: None

KX-T308 system : KX-T30820


KX-T30830
KX-T30850

KX-T616 system : KX-T61620


KX-T61630
KX-T61650

KX-T1232 system: KX-T123220


KX-T123230
KX-T123230D
KX-T123235
KX-T123250

KX-T7000 series : KX-T7020


KX-T7030
KX-T7050
KX-T7130

Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card or Proprietary


ITS Line Circuits (PLC) card are required for
PITS telephones. Hybrid Line Circuits (HLC) card
or Single Line Circuits (SLC) card are required
for single line telephones.
The “Configuration-Slot Assignment” screen
defines which card is installed in which slot.

3-B-19
10.00 Variable Time-Out
Description Programming
The timer values listed below can be set and Reference
System Programming
changed in system programming. VT Dumb
Common system timer values are set by the “System-System Timer” 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
“System–System Timer” screen and “Special “Special Attended-DISA”, 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
Attendant–DISA” screen. The timer values used Delayed Answer
with each trunk group are set by the “Group- Prolong Time
Trunk Group” screen and the timer values used “Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
by the CO lines are set by the "Trunk–CO Line" CO-CO Duration Limit
screen. The timer values used with each Disconnect Time
extension are set by the "Extension-Station" Pause Time
Hook Switch Flash Time
screen.
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
DTMF Duration Time
System timer values: CPC Detection
<1> Held Call Reminder Wink Signal Time-Out
<2> Held Call Reminder (Attendant) “Extension-Station”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-22.00
<3> Transfer Recall Day Ring
<4> Pickup Dial Waiting Night Ring
<5> External First Digit Time-Out “World Select 1 (WS1)” — 10-C-51.00
<6> External Interdigit Time-Out Automatic Redial Retry
Interval
<7> External Interdigit Time-Out (PBX)
“World Select 2 (WS2)” — 10-C-52.00
<8> Toll Restriction Guard Time-Out First Dial Timer
<9> Call Forwarding–No Answer Time-Out First Dial Timer (DID)
<10> Intercept Routing–No Answer Time-Out
(System)
<11> Intercept Routing–No Answer Time-Out
Conditions
(DISA)
<12> Attendant Overflow Time None
<13> SMDR Duration Time
<14> TIE Interdigit Time-Out
<15> DISA Interdigit Time-Out
<16> Delayed Answer (DISA)
<17> Prolonged Time (DISA)
<18> Automatic Redial Retry Interval (WS1)
<19> First Dial Timer (WS2)
<20> First Dial Timer (DID) (WS2)

Trunk group timer values:


<1> CO-CO Duration Limit
<2> Disconnect Time
<3> Pause Time
<4> Hook Switch Flash Time

CO Line timer values:


<1> DTMF Duration Time
<2> CPC Detection Time (Incoming)
<3> Wink Singnal Time-Out

Station timer values:


<1> Delayed Ringing (Day/Night)

3-B-20
(70695)
11.00 Lockout 12.00Automatic Station Release
Description Description
If the extension user remains off-hook after the If an extension user fails to dial any digits within a
completion of a call, he or she will be specified time period after getting a line for
disconnected from the channel after hearing making a call, he or she will be disconnected
reorder tone. from the channel after hearing reorder tone.
Lockout applies to all types of calls:Extension, To get a line for making a call again, the
Intercom and CO line calls. extension user must once go on-hook and then
off-hook.
Programming
When making an outgoing CO call with either
None
PITS and SLT, the timers set by "System-System
timers", External First Digit Time-Out, External
Conditions
Interdigit Time-Out and External Interdigit Time-
If the extension user remains off-hook after the Out (PBX) are used.
completion of a CO call on which “CPC
Detection” has been set to “None,” reorder tone Programming
is not sent even if the other party, on the CO line, Reference
goes on-hook. System Programming
VT Dumb
Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control
(CPC) Signal Detection” for further information. “System-System Timer ”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
External First Digit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
External Interdigit Time-Out
(PBX)

Conditions
This function does not work when originating an
intercom call or extension call with a PITS.

This function works in the following cases when


originating a CO line call with a PITS.

<1> When nothing has been dialed before the


External First Digit Time-Out expires. This
timer is started after CO dial tone has been
heard.
<2> When the External Interdigit Time-Out has
expired during dialing.

This function works in the following cases when


originating a call with an SLT.

<1> When the first digit was not dialed within 10


seconds after dial tone was heard.
<2> When the time between the digits being
dialed exceeds five seconds (only when
originating an extension call).

3-B-21
13.00 Distinctive Dial Tone
The following conditions apply when originating a Description
CO call with an SLT. Multiple dial tone patterns are presented to the
extension user to give some information about
<1> When the first digit was not dialed within 10 selected lines, features set to the lines, etc.
seconds after dial tone was heard.
<2> When the five second interdigit timer expires There are five dial tone types, as follows:
when dialing on a CO line.
<3> When the first digit was not dialed before the Dial tone 1 : Normal dial tone, sounds when
External First Digit Timer Time-Out expires calling on DN buttons.
after the CO dial tone was heard
<4> When the External Interdigit Time-Out Dial tone 2 : Sounds to request an account code
expires during dialing. entry or DISA user code entry, or
sounds when an extension goes
off-hook after Timed Reminder.

Dial tone 3 : Sounds if the extension user has


set any of the following features:

• Do Not Disturb
• Call Forwarding
• Absent Message
• Timed Reminder
• Walking Station
• Walking COS

Dial tone 4 : Sounds if the extension user has


set UCD Log Out.

Dial tone 5 : Sounds when intercom calling (only


for PITS's).

Programming
None

Conditions
The patterns for dial tone are listed in Section 3-
B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.”

3-B-22
14.00 Distinctive Busy Tone
Description Conditions
There are three busy tone patterns as follows: If Automatic Callback to Trunk is programmed,
the function is automatically set when making an
Busy tone 1 : Normal busy tone. outgoing CO call and going on-hook when
hearing busy tone.
Busy tone 2 : A unique busy tone which allows See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
users with busy tone detection Callback-Trunk” for details.
SLT’s to use Busy Override, etc, When the Automatic Callback to Trunk function is
when encountering a busy line. enabled in system programming, special busy
tone is sent. When Automatic Callback to Trunk
Busy tone 3 : A special busy tone sent when a is not enabled in system programming, busy tone
trunk is busy to inform the 1 or busy tone 2 is sent. See Section 3-B-16.00
extension user that Automatic “Tone and Ringing Patterns” for the busy tone
Callback to Trunk will be set by patterns.
going on-hook automatically.

Busy tones 1 and 2 are not used at the same


time. Only one tone is selected by “System-
Operation”, Busy Tone.

If busy tone 2 is selected, PITS’s follow the


setting.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00


Busy Tone

3-B-23
15.00 Confirmation Tone
Description Confirmation tone from external pagers can be
After several operations the system confirms the selected to be sent or not in “Trunk-Pager &
success of the operation by sending a Music Source”, External Pager-Tone.
confirmation tone to the extension user.
Refer to Section 3-B-16.00 “Tone and Ringing
Multiple patterns of confirmation tone is sent Patterns” for the confirmation tone patterns.
when the following operations have been
successfully conducted: Programming
Reference
System Programming
Confirmation tone 1 : VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00


When a function is set, indicates that the new Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in
setting differs from the previous setting. “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tone
Confirmation tone 2 :

When a function is set, indicates that the new Conditions


setting is identical to the previous setting. In
Dial tone is sent after confirmation tone has been
addition, the tone is sent when holding a
sent. However, if the Automatic Callback to
calling party (including Consultation Hold and
Station function has been set, reorder tone is
Call Park) or setting Call Park and when
sent after confirmation tone.
setting or releasing Message Waiting, and
setting BGM through External Pager on and
When a function is set using a PITS with the
off.
display, details of the setting appear on the
display while confirmation tone is sent.
Confirmation tone 3 :
If any operation is performed, the message on
the display will be terminated at that time.
The tone is sent when calling by OHCA,
answering by Call Pickup or by Call Hold
Retrieve-Station, or when making and
answering the paging announcement, or
when calling a doorphone or starting
conference, and so on.

Confirmation tone 4 :

The tone is sent when converting conference


into a two party call.

A setting can be made by programming “System-


Operation”, Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in to
determine whether confirmation tone is to be sent
or not when two party conversation is
successfully converted into a three party
conversation (Busy Override, Conference, etc.).

3-B-24
16.00 Tone and Ringing Patterns
Description
This system offers various tone patterns and
ringing patterns, as listed below:

Tone Patterns

1 sec

Dial tone 1

Dial tone 2

Dial tone 3

Dial tone 4

Dial tone 5 (For intercom calls)

Busy tone 1

Busy tone 2

Busy tone 3

Reorder tone

Ringback tone

Do Not Disturb (DND)


tone
Confirmation tone 1

Confirmation tone 2

Confirmation tone 3

Confirmation tone 4

Warning tone
CO-CO timeout
warning tone
Held Call Reminder
15 sec
Call waiting tone

3-B-25
Ringing Patters

1 sec

CO ringing/CO Held
Call Reminder
Extension ringing/
Extension Held Call
Reminder
Intercom ringing

Callback ringing

Timed Reminder/
Doorphone ringing

See Section 3-B-13.00 “Distinctive Dial Tone” for details of dial tone.
See Section 3-B-14.00 “Distinctive Busy Tone” for details of busy tone.
See Section 3-B-15.00 “Confirmation Tone” for details of confirmation tone.
See Section 3-D-4.00 “Discriminating Ringing.”

Programming
None

Conditions
None

3-B-26
C. Outgoing Call Features

1.00 Toll Restriction (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description The levels of extensions are assigned in “System-


Class of Service”, Toll Restriction Level (Day) and
Toll Restriction is a system programmable feature
Toll Restriction Level (Night) as below:
that, in conjunction with the assigned Class of
Service, can prohibit selected extension users
from placing unauthorized toll call. System-Class of Service OFL PRGSCR DIR
Toll Restriction types depend on the following
four ways of selecting a trunk: Class of Service (COS) No.=01(1/2)

• Local Trunk Dial Access (Refer to Section 3-C- Toll Restriction Level (Day).............. 01
1.01) Toll Restriction Level (Night)............ 02
• Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.02) Level of Extension
• Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (Refer to Section 3-C-1.03)
• Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.04) “Toll Restriction Level of Extension” is referred to
as “TRLE” in the following.
Three Toll Restriction types below are common to Each Toll Restriction type can set its own level
the above listed four methods: and executes restriction by comparing its own
level with TRLE.
• Operator/International Call Restriction For example, the toll restriction level for Local
(Refer to 3-C-1.05) Trunk Dial Access can be programmed in
• 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C- “System-Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction
1.06) Level.
• 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction (Refer to Section 3-C-
1.07)
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

3/6 Digit Toll Restriction and 7/10 Digit Toll


Restriction are used in pairs.
Toll Restriction Level 08
Flow charts and Programming are used to
explain Toll Restriction types.
Flow chart illustrates the flow of procedures. Level of Local Access Group
Programming shows the programming
reference and the method to execute each
program for the procedures illustrated in the flow
chart. Each Programming has a number, which In the flow charts, marks such as “>” are used to
matches the numbers attached to the procedures compare TRLE and the level of each Toll
in the flow chart: <1>, <2> • • • Restriction type.
When TRLE is equal to or higher than the toll
Toll Restriction Level restriction level, it is described as follows:
TRLE ≥ Toll restriction level
Toll restriction level is one of the elements used When TRLE is lower than the toll restriction level,
to judge Toll Restriction. The level consists of 16 it is described as follows:
stages from 01 to 16. 01 is the highest level and TRLE < Toll restriction level
16 is the lowest:
<Example>
01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09,10,11,12,13,14,15,16
TRLE • • • • 03
high low Toll restriction level • • • • 08
The levels above are described as :
The higher the level of an extension is, the less TRLE > Toll restriction level
the extension is restricted. Conversely, the lower
the level the greater the restriction.
3-C-1
(60395)
1.01 Toll Restriction for Local
Trunk Dial Access (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the procedures for “ARS/Local CO line Access” in the system
restricting outgoing calls when a user makes an without ARS service.
outgoing CO call by dialing the feature number for
Start

<1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <2>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in


the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2>Is the selected trunk group No


programmed to “Yes” in
”Class of Service – Trunk-
Prohibits
Group Access”?
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)

No <3> Is the trunk group type in “System-Local Access Group”, Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

Yes

<4> Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in No
“Group-Trunk Group”,PBX Access Code with Restriction ?

Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction Level of Local TRLE≥ TRLL
Access (TRLL).

TRLE<TRLL Calls

Determines whether the call is an operator call (leading digit is 0), Equal
Access, custom calling, local call, or long distance call. ☛1

Local, or long distance call Operator call


Restricted <6> Executes 3/6 Digit Toll
Executes Operator/International Call Restricted
Restriction (Refer to 3-C-1.06) Restriction. (Refer to 3-C-1.05)

Not restricted

Restricted Executes 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Not restricted


(Refer to 3-C-1.07)
Not restricted

Prohibits Calls Calls Prohibits


(Sends reorder (Sends reorder
tone) tone)
Note
☛1 Equal Access is prohibited. Custom Calling is performed.

3-C-2
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
ARS/Local Access PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
Extension users may be restricted from Local PBX Access Code (Restriction)
Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class of Service”,
ARS Local Access, as follows: If this system works into the host PBX, PBX
access code is required to dial through the
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is connected PBX.
impossible (reorder tone is returned). To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access
Code in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code
If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is (Restriction).
possible with restriction by “System-Class of To access the Host PBX without executing Toll
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Restriction, register PBX Access Code in “Group-
Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is
possible with no restriction by “System-Class of Programming <5>
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Programming <2>
“Class of Service (1/2)” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
System Programming Reference Toll Restriction Level (Day)
VT Dumb
and (Night)
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level

Programming <3> TRLL is assigned in the item below:


System Programming Reference
VT Dumb System-Local Access Group OFLPRG LIN DIR
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Local Access Trunk Group
Hunt Sequence
Toll Restriction Level 08
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to Toll Restriction Level of
“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01” Local Access (TRLL)
in Local Access Group is programmed to “PBX,”
the types of the other trunk groups preset to other When TRLL is programmed higher than TRLE,
“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as the procedure advances to the next step.
“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and When TRLL is programmed equal to or lower
“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk than TRLE, the call is not restricted and
group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are performed.
used to judge.

3-C-3
Programming <6>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in the “System-


Local Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the
number of the Area/Office Code Table.

System-Local Access Group OFLPRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 08


Toll Restriction Table 1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry =200

3-C-4
1.02 Toll Restriction in Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) System (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line Access” in
procedures for outgoing calls when an extension the system with ARS service.
user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

Start

<1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2> Is the selected trunk group No


programmed to “Yes” in
“Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes
tone)

Determines whether the call is an operator call


(leading digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local
call, or long distance call. ☛1

Local, or long distance call Operator call

TRLE>TRLL <3>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access


(TRLL) with TRLE in Class of Service. Advances to Toll Restriction
for Operator/International Call
TRLE<TRLL

<4> Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted


(Refer to 3-C-1.06)

Not restricted

Executes 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted


(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Not restricted

<5>Does the dialed number suit the dialing plan (A,B, No


C or D) preset in “System-Operation”, Home
Dialing Plan ?

Yes

Executes ARS. Prohibited by ARS


(Refer to 3-C-2.00)

Prohibits (Sends reorder


Calls tone)
Note
☛1 Equal Access and custom calling are prohibited.
3-C-5
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
ARS/Local Access Toll Restriction Table

The number that is registered in “System-Local


Extension users may be restricted from Local
Access Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the
Trunk Dial Access by the assignment of “System-
number of the Area/Office Code Table.
Class of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is
impossible (reorder tone is returned).

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is Toll Restriction Level 08


possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Toll Restriction Table 1

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is


possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access
assignment. Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables OFL PRG SCR SEL

Area/Office Code Table No. =1 Entry=200


Programming <2>

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb
9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 Programming <5>
“System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access System Programming Reference
VT Dumb

Programming <3> “System-Operation (1/2)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00


Home Dialing Plan
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
Dialing Plan
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
There are four types of dialing plans for local calls
Toll Restriction Level
and long distance calls depending on areas, as
follows:
TRLL is assigned in the item below:
Type A : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR NXX+XXXX

Type B : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction Level 08 NNX+XXXX

Type C : 1+NPX+NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction Level of 1+ NNX+XXXX
Local Access (TRLL) NXX+XXXX

When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restric- Type D : 1+NXX+NXX+XXXX
tion advances to the next step. NXX+NXX+XXXX
When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE, NXX+XXXX
Toll Restriction advances to ARS without execut- Area Code
ing 3/6 and 7/10 Digit Toll Restrictions. Office Code
Subscriber Number
N=2 to 9, P=0 or 1, X=0 to 9
3-C-6
(50195)
1.03 Toll Restriction for Individual
Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
Shows the procedures for restricting outgoing
calls when an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by employing Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access.
Start

<1>Is the selected trunk group set available for access No


in Class of Service?
Yes
<2>Does the selected trunk group belong to the same No
tenant that the extension belongs to?
Yes
No <3>Is the type of the selected trunk group PBX? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)
<4>Does the PBX access code coincide with the code No
that is registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (Restriction).
Yes
TRLE≥TRLT
<5>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Trunk Group
(TRLT) with TRLE in Class of Service.
Calls
TRLE<TRLT
Determines whether the call is an operator call (leading
Local or long distance call Equal Access (101XXXX)
digit is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or
long distance call.
☛1 operator call
Execute Operator/International Call Restriction.
Restricted Not
<6>Execute 3/6 Digit Toll Restricted restricted <7> Does the dialed XXXX coincide
Restriction. No with Equal Access Carrier
Not restricted Code in Equal Access?
Yes
Execute 7/10 Digit Toll Restricted
Restriction. <8>Is the selected trunk group No
available for Equal Access?
Not restricted
Calls Prohibits Calls Yes
(Sends reorder <9>Compares Toll Restriction
tone) Level of Special Carrier Prohibits
Access (TRLS) with TRLE in (Sends reorder
Notes Class of Service. tone)
☛1 Custom calling is performed.
☛2 In case TRLE<TRLS, determines again if the call is TRLE≥TRLS TRLE<TRLS ☛2
an operator call, Equal Access, custom calling, local
call, or long distance call. In this case, checks the Calls
subsequent dialed numbers after “101XXXX.”
3-C-7
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <5>
System Programming Reference System Programming Reference
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level (Day)
and (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
When the selected trunk group is assigned to Toll Restriction Level
“No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access, calling is impossible.
When you want to make a trunk group TRLT is assigned in the item below (Assuming
unavailable for outgoing calls, assign the trunk Trunk Group No.=01):
group to “No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk
Group Access. Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL

Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)


Programming <2>

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb
Toll Restriction Level | 01
“Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00
“Extension-Station”, ICM Group 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Toll Restriction Level of
Trunk Group (TRLT)

The tenant of the selected trunk group is When TRLT is programmed higher than TRLE,
assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant. Toll Restriction advances to the next step.
An extension should belong to one of eight ICM When TRLT is programmed equal to or lower
groups. than TRLE, calling is performed without
The tenant that the extension belongs to is the restriction.
tenant that the ICM group belongs to.
The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is Programming <6>
programmed in “Group-ICM/Paging Group.”
The ICM group that the extension belongs to is System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
programmed in “Extension-Station”, ICM Group.
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Programming <3> Toll Restriction Table

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb
The number that is registered in “Group-Trunk
“Group-Trunk Group”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00
Group”, Toll Restriction Table is the number of
the Area/Office Code Table.
Programming <4>
Reference Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL
System Programming
VT Dumb
Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction) Toll Restriction Table | 3

To execute Toll Restriction, the PBX Access


Code must be registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL
PBX Access Code (Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without Toll Restriction, Area/Office Code Table No. =3 Entry=200
the PBX Access Code must be assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No
Restriction).
3-C-8
Programming <7> Programming <9>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference


VT Dumb VT Dumb
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00 “Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Access”, Equal Access Carrier Access”, Toll Restriction Level
Code

There are four types of Equal Access Tables to TRLS is programmed in the item below:
check if the dialed XXXX corresponds with
assigned numbers in four types of tables. Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1


Equal Access No.=4
Equal Access No.=3
Equal Access No.=2 Toll Restriction Level | 10 | Trunk Group 04 | Yes
Special Carrier Access-Equal Access

Equal Access No.=1 Toll Restriction Level of Special


carrier Access (TRLS)

Equal Access Carrier Code | 2222 | When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,
checks again if the call is an operator call, Equal
Access, custom calling, local call, or long
When the dialed XXXX does not correspond with distance call.
any of the tables, calling is performed without When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower
restriction. than TRLE, calling is performed without
When the dialed XXXX corresponds with any restriction.
table, the procedures in steps 8 and 9 in the flow
chart (3-C-1.03) depend on the table that the
dialed XXXX corresponds with.

Programming <8>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Special Carrier Access-Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Access”, Trunk Group 01-16

3-C-9
(50195)
1.04 Toll Restriction for Individual
Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
Shows the procedures for restricting outgoing
calls when an extension user makes an outgoing
CO call by employing Individual Virtual Trunk Start
Group Dial Access.

<1> Is the selected virtual trunk group set available for No


access in Class of Service? ☛1

Yes

Determines if the call is an operator call (leading digit


is 0), Equal Access, custom calling, local call, or long
distance call. ☛2

Local, or long distance call

TRLE>TRLL <2>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Special Carrier


Access (TRLS) in Equal Access or OCC Access
with TRLE.

TRLE<TRLS

<3>Executes 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted


(Refer to 3-C-1.06)

Not restricted

Restricted
Executes 7/10 digit Toll Restriction.
(Refer to 3-C-1.07)

Not restricted

<4>Does the dialed number suit the dialing plan (A,B, No


C or D) preset in “System-Operation”, Home
Dialing Plan?

Yes

Modifies the dialed number, depending on “Special Prohibits


Carrier Access-Equal Access”, Digit Modification or (Sends reorder
-OCC Access”, Digit Modification. tone)

Notes Calls
☛1. When available, accesses an idle trunk group that is assigned to “Yes” in “Special Carrier Access-Equal
Access” or “-OCC Access.”
☛2.Operator calls, Equal Access, custom calling are prohibited.

3-C-10
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <3>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference


VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Special Carrier Access–Equal 9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
Special Carrier Access Access“, Toll Restriction Table
“Special Carrier Access–OCC 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00
Access”, Toll Restriction Table
Programming <2>
The number that is registered in “Special Carrier
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
Access–Equal Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
9-H-1.00 10-C-30.00
the number of the Area/Office Code Table.
“Special Carrier Access–Equal
Access”, Toll Restriction Level
“Special Carrier Access–OCC 9-H-2.00 10-C-31.00
Access”, Toll Restriction Level Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1


TRLS of Equal Access is assigned in the item
below (when virtual trunk group 1 is designated):

Toll Restriction Table 8 Trunk Group 05 Yes


Special Carrier Access-Equal Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

Equal Access No.=1

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table OFL PRG SCR SEL


Toll Restriction Level 10 Trunk Group 04 Yes
Area/Office Code Table No. =8 Entry=200
Toll Restriction Level of Special
Carrier Access (TRLS)

TRLS of OCC Access is assigned in the item


below (when virtual trunk group 5 is designated):

Special Carrier Access-OCC Access OFL PRG SCR SEL

OCC Access No.=1

Toll Restriction Level 10 Trunk Group 04 Yes

Toll Restriction Level of Special


Carrier Access (TRLS)

When TRLS is programmed higher than TRLE,


the procedure advances to the next step.

When TRLS is programmed equal to or lower


than TRLE, the procedure advances to check the
dial type in “Home Dialing Plan” without executing
3/6 and 7/10 Digit Toll Restrictions.

3-C-11
The number that is registered in “Special Carrier Programming <4>
Access–OCC Access”, Toll Restriction Table is
the number of the Area/Office Code Table. System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
(when virtual trunk group 5 is designated): “System-Operation”, 9-D-1.0010-C-4.00
Home Dialing Plan
Special Carrier Access-OCC Access OFL PRG SCR SEL
There are three types of dialing plans for local
OCC Access No.=1
and long distance calls. Each area has one of
the three plans as mentioned before.

Toll Restriction Table 8 Trunk Group 05 Yes

Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables OFL PRG SCR DIR

Area/Office Code Table No.=8 Entry=200

3-C-12
1.05 Operator/International Call
Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction
procedure for Operator (telephone company) and
International calls.

Start

<1> Compares Operator Call Restriction Level (ORLV) TRLE<ORLV


with TRLE in Class of Service.

Prohibits operator calls and


TRLE>ORLV international calls.
(Sends reorder tone)
Is the call an international call (leading digit is 01 or No
011)?

Yes Operator call is performed.

<2> Compares International Call Restriction Level TRLE<IRLV


(IRLV) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRLE>IRLV

International call is performed.


Prohibits international calls.
(Sends reorder tone)

3-C-13
(60395)
Programming <1> Programming <2>

System Programming Reference Reference


System Programming
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, Restriction 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 “System-Operation”, Restriction 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Level-Operator Level-International

ORLV is assigned in the item below: IRLV is assigned in the following item:

System-Operation OFL PRG SCR SEL System-Operation OFL PRG SCR SEL
Operation(1/3) Operation(1/3)

Restriction Level-Operator 06 Restriction Level-International 05

Operator Call International Call


Restriction Level (ORLV) Restriction Level (IRLV)

When ORLV is programmed higher than TRLE, When IRLV is programmed equal to or lower than
operator and international calls are prohibited. TRLE, international calls are performed.

When ORLV is programmed equal to or lower


than TRLE, operator calls are performed.
International calls advances to the next
procedure.

3-C-14
1.06 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
Local and long distance calls can be restricted by
area codes only, or by office codes only, or by both
area codes and office codes.
The procedures are shown below:

Start

Type-A, B or C <1>Determines if the leading three digits of the telephone Type-A, B or C


Area Code number is an Area Code or Office Code, depending Office Code
on “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan or “Group-
Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan.

Type-D

Is the item “L” in Area/Office Code No


Table assigned to “Y”?

Yes

TRLE ≥ AL Compares “AL” in Area/Office Code Table with


TRLE<OL Compares “OL” in Area/
Office Code Table with
TRLE in Class of Service. TRLE in Class of Service.
TRLE<AL
blank TRLE ≥ OL
Checks “OC” in Area/Office Code Table.

except blank
No
Is office code registered in Office Code Table?

Yes
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

End (Advances to 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction)

3-C-15
(60395)
Programming <1> (1)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction plan
Reference
(General)
System Programming
VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Before programming the toll restriction plan,
Home Dialing Plan determine the TRLE of each extension user in
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00 Class of Service programming.
Dialing Plan
Table 1 Toll Restriction Level of each Extension
When a call is made by ARS or Individual Virtual user
Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by TRLE RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 RL6
“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.
President 1 A A A A A A
When a call is made by Local Trunk Dial Access Vice-President 2 R A A A A A
or Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Manager 3 R R A A A A
Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk
Group”, Dialing Plan. Assistant Manager 4 R R R A A A
Part-Timer 1 5 R R R R A A
Programming <2> Part-Timer 2 6 R R R R R A

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb Legend:
TRLE - Toll Restriction Level of Extension
“Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code 9-I-1.00 10-C-32.00
RL - Restriction Level
Tables”
“Toll Restriction-Office Code 9-I-2.00 10-C-33.00 A - Allowed
Tables” R - Restricted

• Eight Area/Office Code Tables are prepared to


program various restrictions for calling ways
such as Local Trunk Group Dial Access,
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, etc. Each
table consists of 16 screens:


=8



=2
Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Tables
Area Office Code Table No.=1

• 64 Office Code Tables are also prepared.


Each table consists of four screens:

• =64



=02
Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
Office Code Table No.=01

3-C-16
Assuming that your telephone system is located
in the area, Area Code (AC)=200, Office Code
(OC)=320, accordingly, your CO number is (1) +
200 + 320 + XXXX.

Determine the Restriction Level of each AC and


OC respectively according to the TRLE of each
extension user (Table 1).

Table 2 Restriction Level of each AC and OC

the boundaries of Area Code


--------- the boundaries of Office Code

3-C-17
Now program the 3/6 digit toll restriction plan (2)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
according to the Table 1 and Table 2 using “Area/ Plan Using “OC” field.
Office Code Table.”
When you want to restrict an outgoing call for
In some areas, the same 3-digit code may be certain area except a district within that area,
used as both an Area Code and Office Code. program the toll restriction plan by entering Office
Code Table No. in “OC” field of that Area Code
<Example> and set Office Code of the destrict in that Office
1 – 201 – NXX – XXXX, 201 – XXXX Code Table.
Office Code
Assuming that your system is located in Area A
Area Code
AC=200, and Restriction Level of Area B is set to
“10.”
Therefore, assign restriction level for an Area
So extension users with TRLE of 11-16 are
Code in “AL” field and an Office Code in “OL” field
restricted to place a call to Area B.
respectively as shown below.
Area A
AC=200
OC=323 OC=321 Area B
RL=16 RL=16 AC=201
B-1 RL=10
System
OC=322 OC=320 OC=321 OC=320
RL=16 RL=16

Select N (Default Setting)


Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code OC=322 OC=323
Area / Office Code

Select N (Default Setting)


Enter Restriction Level of
Office Code
Area/Office Code

[Note]
AL : Restriction Level for Area Code
OL : Restriction Level for Office Code

3-C-18
(50195)
If you do not want to restrict an extension user (3)Programming the 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
from originating CO calls for district B-1 within Plan by selecting “Y” in “L” field.
Area B, because calls for district B-1 are
considered local calls. In the area where Dialing Plan Type D is
Then enter “01” in “OC” field of Area Code 201, adopted, the system may not be able to identify
and register Office Code 321 in the Office Code the leading three digits of the dialed number as
Table No.=1 as follows. an Area Code or Office Code.

<Example>
NXX + NXX + XXXX — 10 digits local call
NXX + XXXX — 7 digits local call

If your system is located in the Type D area,


program the toll restriction plan as follows.
Select “N” (Default Setting)
Enter Office Code Table No. (01~64)
Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Area / Office Code

Select “Y” (10 digits Local Call)


Enter Restriction Level of Office Code
Enter Restriction Level of Area Code
Area / Office Code

(If “N” is selected in “L” field, the dialed number


“201 + NXX + XXXX” will be checked against the
Select “21”
Restriction Level in “OL” field.)

Now Restriction Level 10 is not applied to calls for [Note]


district B-1 ((1) + 201 + 321 + XXXX). The above example is based on the following
conditions.
• Calls to the AC201 area can be made without
dialing “1” (Toll Prefix), that is, in the “201 +
NXX + XXXX” format.
• Restriction Level for the call is “10.”

3-C-19
(50195)
1.07 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction (◆ for U.S.A. and Canada only)

Flow Chart
7/10 Digit Toll Restriction is to restrict calls that
are not restricted by 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction,
employing office codes and subscriber numbers,
as follows:

Start

<1> Does the dialed number suit the dialing


plan (A,B,C or D) preset in “System- No
Operation”, Home Dialing Plan or in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan ?

Yes

<2> Is the dialed number registered in “Toll No


Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll Restriction” ?

Yes
Prohibits
(Sends reorder tone) Calls

Programming <1> Programming <2>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference


VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00 “Toll Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll 9-I-3.00 10-C-34.00
Home Dialing Plan Restriction”
“Group-Trunk Group”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Dialing Plan
Enter the office codes and the subscriber
When a call is made by ARS or Individual Virtual numbers that you want to restrict into “Toll
Trunk Group Dial Access, the call is judged by Restriction-7/10 Digit Toll Restriction” Table.
“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan. Up to 64 entries can be assigned to the table.

When a call is made by Local Trunk Dial Access Note


or Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
If there are several subscribers who have the
Trunk Access, the call is judged by “Group-Trunk
same office code and the same subscriber
Group”, Dialing Plan.
number in different areas, all the calls for the
subscribers are restricted by entering the code
and the number into the 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction
Table.

3-C-20
(60395)
1.00 Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description
Toll restriction is a system programmable feature Toll restriction level for Trunk Group is referred to
that, in conjunction with the assigned Class of as “TRLT” in the following.
Service, can prohibit the extension users from To assign toll restriction level for an extension user,
making unauthorized toll calls. enter the desired restriction level in System-Class
of Service “Toll Restriction Level (Day)” and “Toll
The following three toll restriction plans can be Restriction Level (Night)” as follows.
programmed depending on a way of making
outgoing calls. System-Class of Service OFL PRG SCR DIR
• Toll Restriction for Local Trunk Dial Access
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.08) Class of Service (COS) No.=01(1/2)
• Toll Restriction for Individual Trunk Group Dial
Access/Direct Trunk Access (Refer to Section Toll Restriction Level (Day).............. 01
3-C-1.09) Toll Restriction Level (Night)............ 02
• Toll Restriction in Automatic Route Selection
(ARS) System (Refer to Section 3-C-1.11)
Toll Restriction Level of
“7-Digit Toll Restriction” applies to all above Extension (TRLE)
mentioned toll restriction plan.
(Refer to Section 3-C-1.10) Toll restriction level of an extension user is referred
to as “TRLE” in the following.
The system administrator in conjunction with the
assigned Class of Service, can assign toll Toll restriction level consists of 16 levels (01 to16).
restriction level for the above mentioned three 01,02 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 15, 16
ways. higher lower

To assign toll restriction level for “Local Trunk


Dial Access,” enter the desired restriction level in An extension user assigned to TRLE of 01 has the
System-Local Access Group “Toll Restriction most privileges, an extension user assigned to
Level” as follows. TRLE of 16 has the least.
When an extension user makes an outgoing CO
System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR call, TRLE of that extension is compared with TRLL
or TRLT.
If TRLE is equal to or higher than TRLL or TRLT
(TRLE TRLL or TRLT), the call is made, and if
Toll Restriction Level 08 TRLE is lower than TRLL or TRLT (TRLE< TRLL or
TRLT), the call will be checked against “7-Digit Toll
Restriction Table.”
Toll Restriction Level of (Refer to Section 3-C-1.10 “7-Digit Toll
Local Access (TRLL) Restriction.”)
Toll restriction level of Local Trunk Dial Access is
referred to as “TRLL” in the following. <Example>
Assuming that TRLL is assigned as 09:
To assign toll restriction level of “Individual Trunk When an extension user assigned to TRLE of 08
Group Dial Access,” enter the desired restriction makes an outgoing CO call, in this case TRLE of 08
level for each trunk group in Group-Trunk Group is higher than TRLL of 09 (TRLE>TRLL), so the call
“Toll Restriction Level” as follows. is made.

Group-Trunk Group OFL PRG SCR SEL When an extension user assigned to TRLE of 10
makes an outgoing CO call, in this case TRLE of 10
Trunk Group No.=01(1/2)
is lower than TRLL of 09 (TRLE<TRLL), then the
call is checked against “7-Digit Toll Restriction
Table.”
Toll Restriction Level| 01

Toll Restriction Level of


Trunk Group (TRLT)
3-C-20-1 (X)
(70695)
1.08 Toll Restriction for Local
Trunk Dial Access (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The following flow chart shows the procedures for
restricting an extension user when an outgoing
CO call is made by dialing the feature number for
“ARS/Local CO line Access.”

Start

<1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in <1>When “ARS/Local Access” in


the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2>Is the selected trunk group No


programmed to “Yes” in
”Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”?
Prohibits
Yes (Sends reorder
tone)

No <3> Is the trunk group type in “System-Local Access Group”, Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01 assigned to PBX?

Yes

<4> Does the PBX Access Code coincide with the code registered in No
“Group-Trunk Group”,PBX Access Code with Restriction ?

Yes

<5> Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll Restriction Level of Local TRLE≥ TRLL
Access (TRLL).

TRLE<TRLL Calls

Restricted Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction


(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Calls
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

(Note)
Bracketed numbers (e.g., <1> <2>) provide a link between an
item on the flow chart and the associated programming items.
(See the following page.)

3-C-20-2 (X)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>
Reference Reference
System Programming System Programming
VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
ARS/Local Access PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
Extension users may be restricted from Local PBX Access Code (Restriction)
Trunk Dial Access by “System-Class of Service”,
ARS Local Access, as follows: If this system works into the host PBX, PBX
access code is required to dial through the
If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is connected PBX.
impossible (reorder tone is returned). To execute Toll Restriction, register PBX Access
Code in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code
If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is (Restriction).
possible with restriction by “System-Class of To access the Host PBX without executing Toll
Service”, Trunk Group Access. Restriction, register PBX Access Code in “Group-
Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is
possible with no restriction by “System-Class of Programming <5>
Service”, Trunk Group Access.
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
Programming <2>
“Class of Service (1/2)” 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
System Programming Reference Toll Restriction Level (Day)
VT Dumb
and (Night)
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level

Programming <3> TRLL is assigned in the item below:


System Programming Reference
VT Dumb System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Local Access Trunk Group
Hunt Sequence
Toll Restriction Level 08
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

When “Type” of the trunk group which is set to Toll Restriction Level of
“Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 01” Local Access (TRLL)
in Local Access Group is programmed to “PBX,”
the types of the other trunk groups preset to other When TRLL is programmed higher than TRLE,
“Hunt Sequence” than “01” are all regarded as the procedure advances to the next step.
“PBX”. “PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and When TRLL is programmed equal to or lower
“PBX Access Code (Restriction)” of the trunk than TRLE, the call is not restricted and
group which is set to “Hunt Sequence 01” are performed.
used to judge.

3-C-20-3 (X)
(60395)
1.09 Toll Restriction for Individual
Trunk Group Dial Access/Direct
Trunk Access (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Flow Chart
The following flow chart shows the procedures for
restricting an extension user when an outgoing
CO call is made by dialing the feature number for
“Trunk Group 01-08/09-16 Dial Access,” or by
pressing SCO/GCO button.
Start

<1>Is the selected trunk group set available for access in No


Class of Service?
Yes
<2>Does the selected trunk group belong to the same No
tenant that the extension belongs to?
Yes
No Prohibits
<3>Is the type of the selected trunk group PBX?
(Sends reorder
Yes tone)
<4>Does the PBX access code coincide with the code
No
that is registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (with Restriction).
Yes
<5>Compares TRLE in Class of Service with Toll TRLE≥TRLT
Restriction Level of Trunk Group (TRLT).
Calls
TRLE<TRLL

Restricted Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction


(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Calls
Prohibits
(Sends reorder
tone)

(Note)
Bracketed numbers (e.g., <1> <2>) provide a link between an
item on the flow chart and the associated programming items.
(See the following page.)

3-C-20-4 (X)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <5>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference


VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service (2/2)”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00 “Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Trunk Group Access Toll Restriction Level (Day)
and (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group(1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
When the selected trunk group is assigned to Toll Restriction Level
“No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access, call is denied.
When you want to make a trunk group
unavailable for outgoing calls, assign the trunk
group to “No” in “System-Class of Service”, Trunk
Group Access.

Programming <2>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Tenant 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
“Group-ICM/Paging Group” 9-E-2.00 10-C-16.00
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
ICM Group

The tenant of the selected trunk group is


assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant.
All extension users should belong to one of eight
ICM groups.
The tenant that the extension belongs to is the
tenant that the ICM group belongs to.
The tenant that the ICM group belongs to is
programmed in “Group-ICM/Paging Group.”
The ICM group that the extension belongs to is
programmed in “Extension-Station”, ICM Group.

Programming <3>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, Type 9-E-1.02 10-C-14.00

Programming <4>
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction)

To execute toll restriction, the PBX Access Code


must be registered in “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX
Access Code (Restriction).
To access the Host PBX without Toll Restriction,
the PBX Access Code must be assigned in
“Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Code (No
Restriction).
3-C-20-5 (X)
(60395)
1.10 7-Digit Toll Restriction (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description
The 7-digit toll restriction feature applies to the (Example)
outgoing CO calls made by the extension users If a call is made by an extension user whose
whose TRLE are lower than TRLL or TRLT. TRLE is 05, the leading three digits of the dialed
The 7-digit toll restriction table is used to perform number is checked against the entries of the toll
toll restriction by checking the leading seven restriction levels 01 to 05, that is, entries 01 to 20.
digits (except the feature number for CO access) If a match is found in the table, the call is denied
of the dialed number. and an extension user receives reorder tone.
If the leading seven digits of dialed number are If no match is found, the call is made.
found in the table, the call is denied and the users
receive reorder tone. Programming
If not found in the table, the call is made. Reference
The system administrator can register up to 64 System Programming VT Dumb
entries (each entry=seven digits) in this table.
“Toll Restriction-7-Digit Toll 9-I-4.00 10-C-34.00
Restriction Table”
Assign entry number as follows.

Conditions
• If no digits were dialed until “External First Digit
Time-Out” timer has expired, an extension user
hears reorder tone.

• If “External Interdigit Time-Out” Timer has


expired before less than seven digits were
dialed, the number dialed is checked against
the entry number in the 7-digit toll restriction
table.

• One of the following three characters “N (2 to


9),” “P (0,1)” and “X (0 to 9)” can be used as a
In this table, each unit of four entry numbers wild card character in any position of the entry
corresponds with toll restriction levels 01 to 16 number.
respectively as follows.
Note:
Entry Number Registered Toll Restriction Software version
Digits Level • V.14.XX or lower version
01 653XXXX 3-Digit Toll Restriction is applied.
02 555XXXX 1
03 • V.15.XX or higher version
04 7-Digit Toll Restriction is applied.
05 423XXXX
06 2
07
08

61 396XXXX
62 16
63
64

3-C-20-6 (X)
(70695)
1.11 Toll Restriction in Automatic
Route Selection (ARS) System (for New Zealand)

Flow Chart
The flow chart below shows the toll restriction feature number for “ARS/Local CO Line Access” in
procedures for outgoing calls when an extension the system with ARS service.
user makes an outgoing CO call by dialing the

Start

<1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in <1> When “ARS/Local Access” in
the Class of Service is the Class of Service is the Class of Service is
programmed to “No RSTR.” programmed to “W/RSTR.” programmed to “No Accs.”

<2> Is the selected trunk group No


programmed to “Yes” in
“Class of Service—Trunk-
Group Access”? Prohibits
(Sends reorder
Yes
tone)

TRLE>TRLL <3>Compares Toll Restriction Level of Local Access


(TRLL) with TRLE in Class of Service.

TRLE<TRLL

<4> Executes 7-Digit Toll Restriction. Restricted


(Refer to 3-C-1.10)

Not restricted

Executes ARS. Prohibited by ARS


(Refer to 3-C-2.02)

Prohibits (Sends reorder


Calls tone)

3-C-20-7 (XNZ)
(70695)
Programming <1> Programming <4>

System Programming Reference System Programming Reference


VT Dumb VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00 “Toll Restriction-7-Digit Toll 9-I-4.00 10-C-34.00
ARS/Local Access Restriction Table”

Extension users may be restricted from Local


Trunk Dial Access by the assignment of “System-
Class of Service”, ARS Local Access, as follows:

If set to “No ACCS” (No Access), calling is


impossible (reorder tone is returned).

If set to “W/RSTR” (With Restriction), calling is


possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

If set to “No RSTR” (No Restriction), calling is


possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access
assignment.

Programming <2>

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb
“System-Class of Service”, 9-D-4.02 10-C-8.00
Trunk Group Access

Programming <3>

System Programming Reference


VT Dumb
“System-Local Access Group”, 9-D-5.00 10-C-9.00
Toll Restriction level

TRLL is assigned in the item below:

System-Local Access Group OFL PRG LIN DIR

Toll Restriction Level 08

Toll Restriction Level of


Local Access (TRLL)

When TRLL is set higher than TRLE, Toll Restric-


tion advances to the next step.
When TRLL is set equal to or lower than TRLE,
Toll Restriction advances to ARS without execut-
ing 7-Digit Toll Restriction.

3-C-20-8 (XNZ)
(70695)
2.00 Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
2.01 ARS (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description 2. Not outdialed via ARS


The following types of calls are not outdialed via
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system
ARS, reorder tone is sent if dialed.
programmable feature that automatically selects
the least expensive route available at the time an
• 9 + 10XXX or 101XXXX (Equal Access*)
outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by
dialing the feature number for “ARS/Local CO • 9 + 11XXX (Custom Calling)
Line Access” from a DN button, then making a • 9 + or # in the leading 3 digits.
long distance call or local call.
• Equal Access Code “10XXX” or “101XXXX” is
A typical application is to deny most extensions decided by EQC command.
dial access to all trunk groups. This forces Refer to Section 10-C-63.00 “Equal Access
extension users to use the ARS feature, which Code (EQC).”
should results in reduced toll charges.
3. Toll Restriction
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred ARS applies to the call after the toll restriction
call routing plan in the system programming procedure.
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-
Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.” 4. ARS Override
If an extension user selects the desired outside
Programming line directly (Individual Line Access). ARS does
not function and a call is routed via selected CO
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb line.
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Automatic Route Selection Operation
Home Dialing Plan
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
“System-Numbering Plan (02/11)”, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00
ARS/Local CO Line Access PHONE button.
“Automatic Route Selection”,
Leading Digit Table 9-J-1.00 10-C-35.00
Office Code Tables (ARS) 9-J-2.00 10-C-36.00
Route Plan Tables 9-J-3.00 10-C-37.00 2. Dial the feature number for
Route Lists Tables 9-J-4.00 10-C-38.00 ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
Modified Digit Tables 9-J-5.00 10-C-39.00 (default).

Conditions
1. ARS Restriction 3. Dial the telephone number of the
ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”, external party.
ARS/Local Access, as follows:
• The system follows the pre-
•If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an programmed sequence and
outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone selects the least expensive route.
is returned.)
• The dialed digits are then sent
•If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) is set , calling after the system adds or deletes
is possible with restriction by “System-Class digits according to the ARS
of Service”, Trunk Group Access. programming.

•If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is


possible regardless of the assignment of
“System-Class of Service”, Trunk Group
Access.
3-C-21
(70695)
(40993)
Explanation <Example>
ARS Programming Explains the procedures to program ARS plan for
calling the XYZ Company, which has the
The following is an example to show the procedures
telephone number “201-234-5678” and is long
for programming ARS feature.
distance.
Five types of tables are used to program ARS
Three telephone service companies are available
feature;
to call the XYZ Company: telephone company A,
The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least
B and C.
expensive route as follows.
Telephone companies A and B are the long
distance carriers.
Programs Routing Procedures
Telephone company A has:
Dial • Local access code: 765-4321
• Authorization number: 012345
Telephone company B has:
(Toll Restriction) • Local access code: 987-6543
• Authorization number: 567890

Leading Digit Table - - - - Analyze the dialed digit Telephone company A is connected to trunk group
Office Code Tables 01.
(ARS) Telephone company B is connected to trunk group
02.
Route Plan Tables - - - - - Analyze the time of day Telephone company C is connected to trunk group
03.

Route Lists Tables - - - - - Check the restriction Telephone companies A, B, and C charges for
level of trunk groups Monday are as follows:
and search an idle
trunk group

high
Modified Digit Tables - - - Modify the dialed digits
Company C

Sends the dialed number

Company B
Charge
Company A
low

12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9
a.m. p.m.
Time

(Table 1)

3-C-22
(40993)
The companies are shown below in order from
least to most expensive :

Hour Least Costly Company Next Less Costly Company Most Costly Company

7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. B A C

1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. B C A

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. A B C

(Table 2)

Based upon Table 2, the order of trunk group


numbers connected to the telephone companies
are shown below:

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3


(Least Costly Trunk Group) (Next Less Costly Trunk Group) (Most Costly Trunk Group)
Route List 01
(7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m.) 02 01 03

Route List 02
(1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m.) 02 03 01

Route List 03
(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) 01 02 03

(Table 3)

3-C-23
(40993)
When an extension user calls the XYZ Company Modified Digit Table
by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
local access code and the authorization number of Enter the digits which you want to add
the telephone company A or B before dialing the automatically to the user dialed number into the
telephone number of XYZ Company, as follows: “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter the number of digits which you want to
When trunk group 01 is selected to use the delete from the beginning of the user dialed
telephone company A; number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.
765-4321 P P 012345 201-234-5678 <Example 1>
Telephone Deleting “012” from the beginning of the user
number of dialed number and adding number “987”,
XYZ Company
Enter “3” in “DEL” field.
Authorization number of Enter “987” in “Digits to be Inserted” field.
the telephone company A
Pause
ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted
Local Access Code of the telephone company A
01 3 987
When trunk group 02 is selected to use the 02
telephone company B; 03
04
987-6543 P P 201-234-5678 567890

Authorization When “9-012-345-6789” is dialed,


number of the 012 345 6789
telephone
Three digits are deleted and “987” is
Telephone company B added here.
number of “987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.
XYZ Company
Pause
Local Access Code of the telephone company B

To add the above local access code and the


authorization numbers of the telephone
companies to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-24
(40993)
<Example 2>
To register the local access code and the When trunk group 02 is accessed:
authorization number of the telephone company A
which you want to add automatically when trunk 987-6543 P P 201-234-5678 567890
group 01 or 02 is accessed, enter those numbers
into “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter these numbers into “Digits to
When trunk group 01 is accessed: be Inserted” field of “ENT” 02.

765-4321 PP 012345 201-234-5678

Enter these numbers into “Digits to


be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

Automatic Route Selection-Modified Digit Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Modified Digit Table (1/2)


ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 0 7654321PP012345 09
02 0 9876543PPH567890 10
03 11
04 12

(Table 4)

The numbers stored in “Digits to be Inserted” is


sent to the CO line first before the user dialed
number is sent.
To insert the user dialed number into the stored
number, enter “H” at the proper place. Then the
user dialed number is inserted where “H” is
entered and sent to the CO line.
The registered numbers in the above table are
sent to the CO line as follows:

When “7654321PP01234” is stored:

7654321 012345 2012345678 is sent to the CO line.

Pause User dialed number

Automatically added number

When “9876543PPH56789” is registered :

9876543 2012345678 567890 is sent to the CO line.

Pause Automatically added number

Automatically added number User dialed number

3-C-25
(40993)
Route Lists Table

Entering “TG”
Enter the trunk group numbers in “TG” field
according to the Table 3.
Enter the numbers “02” “01” “03” (7:00 a.m. to
1:00 p.m.) in Route List #01.
Enter the numbers “02” “03” “01” (1:00 p.m. to
6:00 p.m.) in Route List #02.
Enter the numbers “01” “02” “03” (6:00 p.m. to
7:00 a.m.) in Route List #03.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4


List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 01 03
#02 02 03 01
#03 01 02 03
#04
#05
Trunk group number
(Table 5)

Entering “MOD”
Select the digits that you want to add to or delete
from the telephone number depending on Modified
Digit Table (Table 4) and enter the applicable
“ENT” number in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 02, enter ENT “02” in “MOD” field.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4


List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 02 01 01 03
#02 02 02 03 01 01
#03 01 02 02 03
#04

“ENT” number in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)


(Table 6)
Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.
3-C-26
(40993)
Entering “ALV”
It is possible to set ARS restriction levels from
“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS
restriction level into “ALV” field.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 7)

Entering “WT”
It is programmable to send the warning tone to
the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2
to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in “WT” field of
Priority 2.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 8)

Route Plan Table Route Plan Table No. =01

Enter the starting Hour designated in Table


Start Hour Route List Number (01~64)
2 in the “Start Hour” field.
Enter the “Route List Number” in Route
Hour AM/PM MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. SAT. SUN.
Lists Table (Table 6) depending on the
trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List
Number” field. 7 AM 01
Enter Route List Number “01” for “Hour” : 1 PM 02
7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “02” for “Hour” : 6 PM 03
1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “03” for “Hour” :
6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m..

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route


Lists Table (Table 6) into each field
divided by hour and the day of the week.
Enter the starting Hour according to Table 2.
(Table 9)

3-C-27
(40993)
Leading Digit Table/Office Code Table

1. Leading Digit Table

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route Assuming that your system is located in the area
Plan Table Number (RPN) for Area Code or AC=200, OC=320, that is, your CO number is
Office Code respectively. (1) + 200 + 320 + XXXX, and Route Plan Table
Route Plan Table number assigned to the Area number for each Area Code and Office Code are
Code is applied to the long distance call and determined as follows.
Route Plan table number assigned to the Office
Code is applied to the local call.

AC=205 AC=206
RPN=13 RPN=14
OC=322 OC=320
OC=321 OC=321
AC=201 AC=202
RPN=10 OC=322 OC=320 RPN=10

- - - - - - - - - OC=321 OC=321 - - - - - - - - -
AC=200
--------- ---------
OC=320 OC=321 OC=322 OC=322
OC=320 RPN=2 RPN=5 OC=322
----------

--- SYSTEM ---


OC=320
RPN=2
OC=322 ---------- OC=320
OC=320 - - - - - - - - - OC=324 OC=323 - - - - - - - - - OC=320
RPN=3 RPN=8
- - - - - - - - - OC=321 OC=321 - - - - - - - - -

OC=321 RPN=6 OC=320 OC=322 RPN=11 OC=321


AC=204 AC=203

RPN=13 OC=320 OC=322 RPN=14


AC=208 AC=207

the boundaries of Area Code


--------- the boundaries of Office Code

3-C-28
Assign Route Plan Table number for each Area Code or Office Code as follows,

For Long Distance Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 210 220


201 10,
202 10,
203 11,
204 06,
205 13,
206 14,
207 14,
208 13,

Enter Route Plan Table number for Area Code


Area Code

For Local Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=300

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

300 310 320 , 02 330


301 311 321 , 02 •

• • 322 , 05 •

• • 323 , 08 •

• • 324 , 03 •

• • 325 , •

• • • •

• • • •

Enter Route Plan Table number for Office Code


Office Code

3-C-29
2. Office Code Table

Route Plan Table number for Area Code is


applied to the long distance call, accordingly,
the same Route Plan Table number is applied
to all Office Codes within that area.
Office Code Table is used when you want
assign another Route Plan Table number to
an Office Code within that area.

Assuming that your system is located in the


area AC=201, OC=320, and Route Plan Table
number 7 is applied to the calls for Area A,
AC=200.

Area A
AC=200
RPN=7 OC=321 OC=322
OC=320 Area B
AC=201
OC=323 OC=324 OC=325 OC=321 OC=322
RPN=5

OC=326 OC=327 OC=328 OC=320 OC=323


RPN=2 System

the boundaries of Area Code


--------- the boundaries of Office Code

In above case, usually Route Plan Table number


7 is applied to all Office Codes within Area A,
AC=200.
But if you want to assign Route Plan Table
number 5 to OC=325 and Route Plan Table
number 2 to OC=328 within Area A, program the
Leading Digit Table as follows.

3-C-30
Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 07 210
201
202

Enter Route Plan Table number


Area Code

Office Code Table No.=01(1/4)

2 Hundred Office Code 3 Hundred Office Code

, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , 25
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,

Area Code 200 Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32) 05

Enter the Area Code.


To register the Office Code 325, enter the last two digits of 325 into
“3 Hundred Office Code” field.

200-325-xxxx

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (Table 9) which is applied to calls for
the area, AC=200, OC=325.

Route Plan Table number 5 is applied to the Office Code 325 within the
Area A.

3-C-31
Office Code Table No.=01(1/4)

2 Hundred Office Code 3 Hundred Office Code

, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , ,
, , , , , , , , , , , 28
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,
, , ,

Area Code 200 Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32) 02

Enter the Area Code.


To register the Office Code 328, enter the last two digits of 328 into
“3 Hundred Office Code” field.

200-328-xxxx

The last two digits of the Office Code

Enter the Route Plan Table number (Table 9) which is applied to calls
for the area, AC=200, OC=328.

Route Plan Table number 2 is applied to the Office Code 328 within the
Area A.

3-C-32
The flow chart shows the procedures for ARS feature:

The user dials.


(After passing through the toll restriction procedure)

Following “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan,


determines whether the leading digits indicate an area
code or an office code.

Office code Area code

Leading Digit Table (LDT) Leading Digit Table/Office Code Table

Checks whether Route Plan


Checks whether Route Plan Table number is entered or not
Table number is entered or in “AC” field.
not in “OC” field.

Not entered Not entered


(blank) Entered (blank) Entered

Prohibits, sends Checks whether dialed Area


reorder tone Code is entered or not in “Area
Prohibits. Code” of Office Code Table.
Sends reorder tone.
Not entered Entered

Obtains applicable Route Checks whether dialed Office


Plan Table number from Code is entered in Office Code
Leading Digit Table Table which contains dialed
Area Code.

Not entered Entered

Obtains applicable Obtains applicable Route Plan


Route Plan Table Table number from Office Code
number from Table which contains dialed
Leading Digit Table Area Code and Office Code

Route Plan Table

Determines Route List number by the present time of the day. (Sends reorder tone when
Route Plan Table is not stored.)

Continued to Route Lists Table

3-C-33
Continued from Route Plan Table

Route Lists Table

Obtainable Checks whether an idle line


is obtainable or not from the
trunk group assigned to
Priority 1 in “TG.” Priority 1

Not obtainable

Checks whether Priority 2 is Not assigned


assigned or not.

Assigned
Priority 2
TRLE ≥ ALV ☛1 No

Yes Priority 3

Not obtainable Checks whether an idle line Priority 4


is obtainable or not from the
trunk group entered in “TG.”
Sends busy
Assigned tone.
Obtainable

Checks whether Checks whether sending


the next priority is warning tone is assigned or
assigned or not. not in “WT.” Not assigned

Not assigned Assigned

Sends busy Sends warning


tone. tone.

Checks the number


entered in “MOD.”

From 01 to 32

Continued to Modified Digit Table

☛1 TRLE : toll restriction level of extension assigned


in Class of Service.

3-C-34
(50195)
Continued from Route Lists Table

Modified Digit Table (MDT)

Checks the number 0


entered in “DEL” field.

From 1 to 9

Deletes the number of digits entered in “DEL” field from the begin-
ning of the user dialed number except the feature number for “ARS/
Local CO Line Access.”

Adds the digits entered in “Digits to be Inserted” field to


the user dialed number.

Calls

3-C-35
2.02 ARS (for New Zealand)
Description
Automatic Route Selection (ARS) is a system 3. Toll Restriction
programmable feature that automatically selects ARS applies to the call after the toll restriction
the least expensive route available at the time an procedure.
outgoing CO call is made. It is executed by
dialing the feature number for “ARS/Local CO 4. ARS Override
Line Access” from a DN button, then making a If an extension user selects the desired outside
long distance call or local call. line directly (Individual Line Access), ARS does
not function and a call is routed via selected
A typical application is to deny most extension's CO line.
dial access to all trunk groups. This forces
extension users to use the ARS feature, which Operation
should results in reduced toll charges.
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
To utilize the ARS feature, program the preferred PHONE button.
call routing plan in the system programming
“Automatic Route Selection,” then set “System-
Operation”, Automatic Route Selection to “Yes.”
2. Dial the feature number for
Programming ARS/Local CO Line Access “9”
(default).
System Programming Reference
VT Dumb
“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Automatic Route Selection
Home Dialing Plan 3. Dial the telephone number of the
“System-Numbering Plan (02/11)”, 9-D-6.02 10-C-10.00 external party.
ARS/Local CO Line Access
“Automatic Route Selection”, • The system follows the pre-
Leading Digit Table 9-J-6.00 10-C-35.00 programmed sequence and
Route Plan Tables 9-J-7.00 10-C-37.00 selects the least expensive
Route Lists Tables 9-J-8.00 10-C-38.00
route.
Modified Digit Tables 9-J-9.00 10-C-39.00

• The dialed digits are then sent


Conditions after the system adds or deletes
1. ARS Restriction digits according to the ARS
ARS is restricted by “System-Class of Service”, programming.
ARS/Local Access, as follows:

• If “No ACCS” (No Access) is set, making an


outgoing CO call is impossible (reorder tone is
returened.)

• If “W/RSTR” (With Restriction) is set, calling is


possible with restriction by “System-Class of
Service”, Trunk Group Access.

• If “No RSTR (No Restriction) is set, calling is


possible regardless of the assignment of “Sys-
tem-Class of Service”, Trunk Group Access.

3-C-35-1(XNZ)
(70695)
Explanation <Example>
ARS Programming Explains the procedures to program ARS plan for
calling the XYZ Company, which has the
The following is an example to show the procedures
telephone number “03-234-5678” and is long
for programming ARS feature.
distance.
Five types of tables are used to program ARS
Three telephone service companies are available
feature;
to call the XYZ Company: telephone company A,
The ARS feature, when accessed, selects the least
B and C.
expensive route as follows.
Telephone companies A and B are the long
distance carriers.
Programming Routing Procedures
Telephone company A has:
Dial • Local access code: 765-4321

Telephone company B has:


(Toll Restriction) • Local access code: 987-6543

Leading Digit Table - - - - Analyze the dialed digit Telephone company A is connected to trunk group
01.
Telephone company B is connected to trunk group
02.
Route Plan Tables - - - - - Analyze the time of day Telephone company C is connected to trunk group
03.

Route Lists Tables - - - - - Check the restriction Telephone companies A, B, and C's charges for
level of trunk groups Monday are as follows:
and search an idle
trunk group

high
Modified Digit Tables - - - Modify the dialed digits
Company C

Sends the dialed number

Company B
Charge
Company A
low

12 3 6 9 12 3 6 9
a.m. p.m.
Time

(Table 1)

3-C-35-2(XNZ)
(70695)
The companies are shown below in order from
least to most expensive :

Hour Least Costly Company Next Less Costly Company Most Costly Company

7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m. B A C

1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m. B C A

6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m. A B C

(Table 2)

Based upon Table 2, the order of trunk group


numbers connected to the telephone companies
are shown below:

Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3


(Least Costly Trunk Group) (Next Less Costly Trunk Group) (Most Costly Trunk Group)
Route List 01
(7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m.) 02 01 03

Route List 02
(1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m.) 02 03 01

Route List 03
(6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m.) 01 02 03

(Table 3)

3-C-35-3(XNZ)
(70695)
When an extension user calls the XYZ Company Modified Digit Table
by selecting trunk group 01 or 02, he must dial the
local access code of the telephone company A or Enter the digits which you want to add
B before dialing the telephone number of XYZ automatically to the user dialed number into the
Company, as follows: “Digits to be Inserted” field.
Enter the number of digits which you want to
When trunk group 01 is selected to use the delete from the beginning of the user dialed
telephone company A; number except the feature number for “ARS /
Local CO Line Access” into “DEL” field.
765-4321 P P 03-234-5678
<Example 1>
Telephone
number of Deleting “03” from the beginning of the user
XYZ Company dialed number and adding number “987”,

Enter “2” in “DEL” field.


Enter “987” in “Digits to be Inserted” field.

Pause

Access Code of the telephone company A ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 2 987
When trunk group 02 is selected to use the 02
telephone company B; 03
04
987-6543 P P 03-234-5678

When “9-03-345-6789” is dialed,


03 345 6789
Two digits are deleted and “987” is added
Telephone here.
number of “987 345 6789” is sent to the CO line.
XYZ Company
Pause
Access Code of the telephone company B

To add required access code of the telephone


company to the user dialed digits, the Modified
Digit Table is made up in the following manner.

3-C-35-4(XNZ)
(70695)
<Example 2>
To register the access code required by the When trunk group 02 is accessed:
telephone company which you want to add
automatically when trunk group 01 (telephone 9876543 P P 03-234-5678
company A) or 02 (telephone company B) is
accessed, enter those numbers into “Digits to be Enter these numbers into “Digits to
Inserted” field. be Inserted” field of “ENT” 02.

When trunk group 01 is accessed:

7654321 PP 03-234-5678

Enter these numbers into “Digits to


be Inserted” field of “ENT” 01.

Automatic Route Selection-Modified Digit Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Modified Digit Table (1/2)

ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted ENT. DEL Digits to be Inserted

01 0 7654321PP 09
02 0 9876543PP 10
03 11
04 12
register the required access code
(Table 4)

The numbers stored in “Digits to be Inserted” is


sent to the CO line first before the user dialed
number is sent.
The registered numbers in the above table are
sent to the CO line as follows:

7654321 03-234-5678 is sent to the CO line.

Pause User dialed number

Automatically added number

3-C-35-5(XNZ)
(70695)
Route Lists Table

Entering “TG”
Enter the trunk group numbers in “TG” field
according to the Table 3.
Enter the numbers “02” “01” “03” (7:00 a.m. to
1:00 p.m.) in Route List #01.
Enter the numbers “02” “03” “01” (1:00 p.m. to
6:00 p.m.) in Route List #02.
Enter the numbers “01” “02” “03” (6:00 p.m. to
7:00 a.m.) in Route List #03.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4


List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 01 03
#02 02 03 01
#03 01 02 03
#04
#05
Trunk group number
(Table 5)
Entering “MOD”
Select the digits that you want to add to or delete
from the telephone number depending on Modified
Digit Table (Table 4) and enter the applicable
“ENT” number in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 01, enter ENT “01” in “MOD” field.
For trunk group 02, enter ENT “02” in “MOD” field.

Automatic Route Selection-Route Lists Table OFL PRG SCR DIR

Route Lists Table (1/6)

Route Priority 1 Priority 2 Priority 3 Priority 4


List TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD
#01 02 02 01 01 03
#02 02 02 03 01 01
#03 01 02 02 03
#04

“ENT” number in Modified Digit Table (Table 4)


(Table 6)
Leave “MOD” field blank if there are no digits to be entered or deleted.
3-C-35-6(XNZ)
(70695)
Entering “ALV”
It is possible to set ARS restriction levels from
“01” to “16” for Priority 2, 3, and 4. Enter ARS
restriction level into “ALV” field.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 7)

Entering “WT”
It is programmable to send the warning tone to
the user or not when the trunk group of Priority 2
to 4 are seized, by selecting “Y” in “WT” field of
Priority 2.

TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD WT ALV TG MOD

(Table 8)

Route Plan Table Route Plan Table No. =01

Enter the starting Hour designated in Table


Start Hour Route List Number (01~64)
2 in the “Start Hour” field.
Enter the “Route List Number” in Route
Hour AM/PM MON. TUE. WED. THU. FRI. SAT. SUN.
Lists Table (Table 6) depending on the
trunk group in Table 3 into “Route List
Number” field. 7 AM 01
Enter Route List Number “01” for “Hour” : 1 PM 02
7:00 a.m. to 1:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “02” for “Hour” : 6 PM 03
1:00 p.m. to 6:00 p.m..
Enter Route List Number “03” for “Hour” :
6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m..

Enter the “Route List Number” in Route


Lists Table (Table 6) into each field
divided by hour and the day of the week.
Enter the starting Hour according to Table 2.
(Table 9)
3-C-35-7(XNZ)
(70695)
Leading Digit Table

Leading Digit Table is used for assigning Route


Plan Table Number (RPN) for Area Code or
Office Code respectively.
Route Plan Table number assigned to the Area
Code is applied to the long distance calls, and
Route Plan table number assigned to the Office
Code is applied to the local calls or VPN (Virtual
Private Network) calls.

Assign Route Plan Table number for each Area Code or Office Code as follows,

For Long Distance Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=200

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

200 210 220


201 10,
202 10,
203 11,
204 06,
205 13,
206 14,
207 14,
208 13,

Enter Route Plan Table number for Area Code


Area Code

For Local Call NPN Call

Automatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table ONL PRG SCR DIR

Leading Digit Table Entry=300

Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC Entry AC,OC

300 310 320 , 02 330


301 311 321 , 02 •

• • 322 , 05 •

• • 323 , 08 •

• • 324 , 03 •

• • 325 , •

• • • •

• • • •

Enter Route Plan Table number for Office Code


Office Code
3-C-35-8(XNZ)
(70695)
Routing the VPN (Virtual Private Network) calls
VPN calls can be routed using one of the following two ways.
1. Using the ARS Procedures
ARS procedures can be used for routing the VPN calls.
In this case, VPN access code “1” should be attached to the beginning of the extension user dialed
number using the Modified Digit Table.

(Example)
Dialed number: 9-250-1234

After modification: 1-250-1234

VPN access code

2. Using the TIE trunk call procedures


TIE trunk call procedures can be used for routing the VPN calls as follows.

(Example)
Calling to VPN extension 5000

Call Flow
1.Ext.100 dials 5000.
2.Ext.100 is connected to VPN Ext.5000

Programming example:
• System-Numbering Plan (9-D-6.00, 10-C-10.00)
Other PBX Extension 01:50
• Special Attended - TIE Line Routing Table (9-K-4.00, 10-C-65.01)

No. Code Delete Insert Trunk Group Hunt Sequence


Digit Dial
01 02
01 5XX 0 02 03
02
.
.

3-C-35-9(XNZ)
(70695)
The flow chart shows the procedures for ARS feature:

An outside call is made.


(After passing the toll restriction procedure)
Leading Digit Table

Long distance call? (the first digit is “0”) or


Local call? (the first digit is not “0”)

Local call Long distance call

Is Route Plan Table number Is Route Plan Table number


entered in “OC” field of the entered in “AC” field of the
dialed number? dialed number?

No Yes Yes No

The call is prohibited. The call is prohibited.


Reorder tone is sent. Reorder tone is sent.

Obtains applicable Route Plan Table


number from Leading Digit Table.

Route Plan Table


Determines Route List number by the present time of the day. (Sends reorder
tone when Route Plan Table is not stored.)

Continued to Route Lists Table

3-C-35-10(XNZ)
(70695)
Continued from Route Plan Table

Route Lists Table

Obtainable Checks whether an idle line


is obtainable or not from the
trunk group assigned to
Priority 1 in “TG.” Priority 1

Not obtainable

Checks whether Priority 2 is Not assigned


assigned or not.

Assigned
Priority 2
TRLE ≥ ALV ☛1 No

Yes Priority 3

Not obtainable Checks whether an idle line Priority 4


is obtainable or not from the
trunk group entered in “TG.”
Sends busy
Assigned tone.
Obtainable

Checks whether Checks whether sending


the next priority is warning tone is assigned or
assigned or not. not in “WT.” Not assigned

Not assigned Assigned

Sends busy Sends warning


tone. tone.

Checks the number


entered in “MOD.”

From 01 to 32

Continued to Modified Digit Table

☛1 TRLE : toll restriction level of extension assigned


in Class of Service.

3-C-35-11(XNZ)
(70695)
Continued from Route Lists Table

Modified Digit Table (MDT)

Checks the number 0


entered in “DEL” field.

From 1 to 9

Deletes the number of digits entered in “DEL” field from the begin-
ning of the user dialed number except the feature number for “ARS/
Local CO Line Access.”

Adds the digits entered in “Digits to be Inserted” field to


the user dialed number.

Calls

3-C-35-12(XNZ)
(70695)
3.00 Tone/Pulse Conversion
Description Conditions
When the DTMF dial mode is established on a When making a CO call, if the trunk is assigned
CO line, the dial signal sent from an extension to a PULSE dial mode, in the following conditions
(tone or pulse dial mode) is converted into DTMF the dial signal is converted into DTMF signal after
signals by the COT (LCOT,GCOT) card and sent sending a telephone number.
to the Central Office.
If the PULSE dial mode is established on a CO 1) A telephone number belongs to “Special
line, the dial signal sent from an extension (tone Carrier Access-OCC Access.”
or pulse dial mode) is converted into pulse signal 2) The selected trunk group belongs to the
by the COT card and sent to the Central Office. trunk group in “Special Carrier Access-
OCC Access.”
The “DTMF dial mode” or “PULSE dial mode” is
set in "Trunk-CO Line", Dial Mode. After External Feature Access, until the
Set “DTMF” for a CO line which can accept both maximum digits are dialed, the dialing mode is
DTMF and PULSE dialing. changed to the mode set in “Trunk-CO Line”, Dial
Mode.
Programming (With a PITS, Tone Though mode is released
Reference temporarily during this time.)
System Programming
VT Dumb
With a PITS, Tone Through mode is established
“Trunk-CO Line”, Dial Mode 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
automatically after the dialing sequence.
After pressing the Tone Through Break button,
until the maximum digits are dialed, the dialing
mode becomes the dialing mode set in “Trunk-
CO Line”, Dial Mode. Tone Through mode is
released temporarily during the time.
Refer to Section 4-G-12.00 “Tone Through (End
to End DTMF Signaling)” for further information.

3-C-36
4.00 Automatic Pause Insertion
Description Programming
When a host PBX or Centrex is accessed and Reference
System Programming
PBX access code with no restriction or restriction VT Dumb
is programmed, a pause is automatically inserted
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
after the access code. Type
This function can only be executed for a trunk Pause Time
group whose Type PBX. The access code after “Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
which the pause is to be inserted is determined by PBX Access Code (No
programming “Group-Trunk Group”, PBX Access Restriction)
Code (No Restriction) or (Restriction) PBX Access Code (Restriction)
An example of using the system as behind PBX is
given below.
Conditions
<Example> When the type of the top priority trunk group is
Dial details: 811 9 201 3456 PBX with the “System-Local Access Group”,
Local Access Trunk Group Hunt Sequence
Telephone
setting, all local access is considered to be host
number
PBX or Centrex line access. The data set in the
Host PBX CO line top priority trunk group is used as the data
access code required for the access.
Feature number for
In the same trunk group, the access codes set in
selecting the CO line
“PBX Access Code (No Restriction)” and “PBX
Access Code (Restriction)” must be different.
When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)”, the pause is automatically inserted
after dialing 9.
When “9” is entered in “PBX Access Code
(Restriction)”, the pause is automatically inserted
after dialing 9, and the outgoing restrictions are
checked for the “201 3456” phone number.
The length of the automatically inserted pause
depends on the “Group-Trunk Group”, Pause
Time setting.

3-C-37
D. Receiving Features

1.00 Attendant Console Operation


Description An incoming call from a CO line can be routed to the Attendant Console
operator who can then transfer it to the target extension.
This function works by setting “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming Mode
(Day) to ATT (Attendant Consoles).
Up to two Attendant Consoles (with CRT display — Optional) can be
equipped with the KX-T336 system.
The Attendant Console Line Circuit (ATLC) Port 1 is for Attendant
Console 1 and Port 2 is for Attendant Console 2.
Outline drawings of the basic process are shown below.

Attendant Console Incoming Mode


1. Single Console Operation

• When Tenant Service is employed:


Tenant 1 Tenant 2
Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls incoming CO calls incoming CO calls

Attendant Attendant Attendant


Console 1 Console 1 Console 2

2. Dual Console Operation

• When Tenant Service is employed:


Tenant 1 or 2
Attendant-seeking Attendant-seeking
incoming CO calls incoming CO calls

Attendant Attendant Attendant Attendant


Console 1 Console 2 Console 1 Console 2

3-D-1
(30393)
Dual Console Operation
When two attendant consoles are equipped with the system, one of the
following three types of Incoming Mode can be selected.
Options B and C work only for the incoming outside call routed via a CO
line which belongs to a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is
assigned as “ATT.”
A. Load Sharing (Section 3-D-1.01)
Incoming calls are distributed evenly to two attendant consoles so that
they can share the same load. (default)
B. Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-1.02)
An incoming outside call rings at two attendant consoles
simultaneously.
C. Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-1.03)
If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not
answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it
will be automatically transferred to another attendant console.

This selection can be done by entering the WS3 command at Dumb


programming mode.
Refer to “Attendant Incoming Mode” in Section 10-C-53.00 World Select 3
(WS3).

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions (1)The attendant console is not available to receive a call in:


• Night mode (Section 3-B-8.00)
• ATT-FWD mode (Section 6-A-1.00)

(2)What if all six LOOP keys on the attendant console are in use?
• Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station (Section 6-G-2.00)

(3)What if an incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key is not


answered?
• Automatic Redirection If No Answer (Section 6-G-7.00)

(4)Tenant Service
To use two attendant consoles in dual console operation mode, both
consoles should belong to either one of two Tenants.

(5) Operator Assignment


With Dual Console Operation, two attendant consoles must be
programmed as operator 1 and operator 2 for the above operation to
be valid. See Section 3-B-5.00 “Operator” for further information.

3-D-2
(30393)
1.01 Load Sharing
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system,
incoming calls directed to the attendant console are distributed to each
console evenly so that both consoles can share the same load.

KX-T336 System

ATT 1
1st
3rd
2nd
4th
Incoming call
ATT 2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.


This setting can be changed to one of the following other two settings by
using the WS3 command at Dumb programming mode.
• Simultaneous Ringing (Section 3-D-1.02)
• Interconsole IRNA (Section 3-D-1.03)
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. General and Specific Calls


Incoming outside calls directed to the attendant console are categorized as
“General” or “Specific.”
(General Calls)
• Operator Call (General)
• Incoming outside calls routed via CO lines which belong to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT.”
• FDN for General Operator Call
(Specific Calls)
• Operator Calls (Specific)
• Directory Number for ATT1 and 2

2. Call Distribution Order


General calls are distributed to each console on the basis of “First In First
Out.”
Specific calls always arrive at the specified attendant console.

3-D-2-1
(30393)
3. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to a
Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a LOOP
key of ATT1 or 2 is not answered within a specified time (Attendant
Overflow Time), it may be redirected to the extension assigned as the
overflow destination.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.

KX-T336 System

ATT 1

ATT 2 Ringing at ATT2



No Answer

Time Out (Attendant Overflow Time)
Overflow Extension ↓
Ringing at Overflow Extension

3-D-2-2
(30393)
1.02 Simultaneous Ringing
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system, an
incoming outside call directed to the attendant console will ring on a LOOP
key of both attendant consoles simultaneously.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing

Incoming outside call

ATT 2 Ringing

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.


This “Simultaneous Ringing” setting can be selected by using the WS3
command at Dumb programming mode.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. A call will ring simultaneously at both ATT1 and 2 when:


• An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”
• Both ATT1 and 2 are available to receive a call.
• An idle LOOP key is available at both ATT1 and 2.
Otherwise, a call will ring at either one of two attendant consoles.
2. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a
LOOP key of two attendant consoles simultaneously is not answered
within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it may be redirected
to the extension assigned as the overflow destination.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing

ATT 2 Ringing
No Answer

Time Out
Overflow Extension ↓
Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-3
(30393)
1.03 Interconsole IRNA
Description When two attendant consoles are equipped with the KX-T336 system, if an
incoming outside call ringing at a LOOP key of one attendant console is
not answered within a specified time (Attendant Overflow Time), it will be
redirected to another attendant console automatically.
KX-T336 System

ATT 1 Ringing at ATT1


Incoming outside call ↓
No Answer

Time Out
ATT 2 ↓
Ringing at ATT2

In Dual Console Operation mode, “Load Sharing” is the default setting.


This “Interconsole IRNA” setting can be selected by using the WS3
command at Dumb programming mode.
Refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World Select 3 (WS3)” for further information.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Day)
“World Select 3 (WS3)”, — 10-C-53.00

Conditions 1. Interconsole IRNA works when:


• An incoming call is routed via a CO line which belongs to a Trunk
Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned as “ATT.”
• An idle LOOP key is available at the second console when a call
ringing at the first console is not answered within a specified time.
2. Attendant Overflow Time
The timer which applies to the feature is “System—System Timer”,
Attendant Overflow Time.
3. Automatic Redirection If No Answer
If an incoming outside call (a call routed via a CO line which belongs to
a Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is “ATT”) ringing on a
LOOP key of ATT2 (see illustration above) is not answered within a
specified time (Attendant Overflow Time) it may be redirected to the
extension assigned as the overflow extension.
Refer to Section 6-G-7.00 “Automatic Redirection If No Answer” for
further information.
KX-T336 System

Ringing at ATT2
ATT 2 ↓
No Answer

Time Out

Overflow Extension Ringing at overflow extension

3-D-2-4
(30393)
2.00 Attendant Console-less
Operation
2.01 Direct In Line (DIL)
Description Programming
Once set in system program, this function makes DIL 1:1
it possible for an incoming call from a CO line to
Reference
go directly to an extension without assistance of System Programming
VT Dumb
the attendant.
This function can be performed in two ways, as “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
described below. Incoming Mode (Day)
Incoming Mode (Night)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
DIL 1:1:For putting an incoming call from a CO
Trunk Group
line trunk to a single destination Direct Termination
Assignable destinations are:

• Extension User DIL 1: N


• FDN for Remote
Reference
• FDN for UCD group System Programming
VT Dumb

DIL 1: N: For putting an incoming call from a CO “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
line to a maximum of eight destinations Incoming Mode (Day)
simultaneously Incoming Mode (Night)
“Group-Trunk Group (2/2)”, 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00
Assignable destinations are:
Destination (DIL 1: N Only)
Type and Number
• Extension User
• Pickup Group
• ICM Group
To use the DIL 1:1 and DIL 1: N functions,
program “Group-Trunk Group”,Incoming/Outgoing
For DIL 1:1, set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming
to Both-Way or Incoming Only.
Mode (Day) to DIL 1:1, and program the CO
line to this Trunk Group using “Trunk- CO Line”,
Conditions
Trunk Group. Then set the incoming destination
in “Trunk-CO Line”, Direct Termination. If CO buttons are assigned, an incoming call to a
PITS will arrive at one of the CO buttons (except
For DIL 1: N, program “Group-Trunk Group”, PCO button). If no CO button is assigned, it will
Incoming Mode (Day) to DIL 1: N, and program arrive at a PDN.
the “Group-Trunk Group”, Destination (DIL 1: N
Only) Type and Number. When a DIL 1:1 incoming call arrives at a PDN, it
will also arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
To use these functions in the Night mode, set the owner is that PDN.
Day mode to the DIL 1:1 or DIL 1: N setting, and
set “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming Mode (Night) When a DIL 1: N incoming call arrives at a PDN,
to Day Mode. it will not arrive at a PITS having a SDN whose
owner is that PDN.

It is programmable that an incoming CO call


routed via DIL 1:N feature arrives at “CO button
only” or “CO button or PDN button.” For further
information, refer to Section 10-C-53.00 “World
Select 3 (WS3).”

3-D-3
2.02 Direct Inward System Access
(DISA)
Description Programming
DISA allows an outside party calling into the System Programming
Reference
system on a DTMF line to directly access certain VT Dumb
system features, without attendant assistance. “Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
After gaining access to the system, the caller can “System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
access allowed features by dialing the appropriate Intercept Routing Time-Out
feature number. (DISA)
The caller is required to enter DISA User Code “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
before being allowed to make an outgoing CO call Incoming Mode (Day)
via DISA feature. Incoming Mode (Night)
Intercept Routing (Day)
Once a DISA call has gained access to the
Intercept Routing (Night)
system, it is treated as any other incoming CO call. “Trunk-AGC” 9-F-3.00 10-C-21.00
“Special Attended-DISA” 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
Extension call via DISA is made as follows: to 41.00
Outgoing call via DISA is made as follows:

Conditions
System
central If Tenant Service is employed, the affiliation of
office DISA card can be programmed by “Special
Attended-DISA”, Tenant.
Outside extension
Party
Automatic Gain Control can be used for DISA to
maintain the volume of CO-CO call via DISA
To utilize DISA feature, a DISA card is required feature by equipping up to four AGC cards. If
Tenant Service is employed, the AGC card can
be assigned to a tenant in “Trunk-AGC.”
System
central
office Dialing “* ” allows the user to call again or
disconnect the line. It is possible to disable it by
Outside setting “Special Attended-DISA”, Control Code
Party “* ” to “No.”
central
office Four digit DISA User Code is necessary for
making outgoing calls via DISA. It is assigned in
“Special Attended-DISA”, DISA User Code.

To execute Intercept Routing-No Answer and


Rerouting for DISA calls, assign “System-System
Outside Party Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA) and
“Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day)
and assign “Special Attended-DISA”, For Use to and (Night).
“DISA.” For further information, refer to Section 3-F-5.00
“Intercept Routing-No Answer (IRNA).”
It can be used as one of the following four ways.
1. OGM 1 for UCD with OGM
2. OGM 2 for UCD with OGM
3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)
Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the
system.

3-D-4
(40993)
Conditions Operation
DISA calls should be made from external callers Calling an extension from outside
by DTMF dial type telephone instruments.
1. Dial the telephone number of the
line which is programmed as a
If reorder tone is returned but “* ” is not dialed in
DISA line in this system.
10 seconds, the line will be disconnected.

Rerouting starts in the cases below: • You hear ringback tone until
the system detects your call.
1) When nothing is dialed in 10 seconds during • When it is detected, you hear
no tone heard after OGM is sent. the outgoing message if
2) When a wrong extension number is dialed. recorded, or no tone if not
3) When the number of “Out Service” status recorded.
extension is dialed.
4) When a wrong DISA user code is dialed. 2. Dial the directory number of the
extension.
If the destination of Intercept Routing is
programmed, extension calls unanswered in • You hear ringback tone.
programmed period are forwarded to the
destination. The call will be disconnected after 3. When the extension answers,
60 seconds, if the destination does not answer. start conversation.
If no destination is programmed, extension calls
are disconnected after 60 seconds, if
unanswered.

Procedures for outgoing calls are similar to that


from extensions.

Warning tone is sent during CO-CO conversation


15 seconds before time limit programmed in
“Group-Trunk Group”, CO-CO Duration Limit. It
is possible to prolong the duration by dialing a
digit other than “* ” and “#.” Prolonging the
duration is enabled or disabled by system
programming.

It can be selected whether detecting of the CPC


signal is done at the end of the CO-CO
conversation or not in “Trunk-AGC”, Tone Detect.

If “Tone Detect” is set to “Yes,” the following will


occur in each case:

<1> If the calling party finishes first, both lines


are disconnected.

<2> If the receiving party finishes first, reorder


tone is sent to the caller.

3-D-5
Calling an external party Calling again
1. Dial the telephone number of the While talking with an external party, or hearing
line which is programmed as a ringback tone, busy tone, or reorder tone.
DISA line in this system.
1. Dial “* .”
• You hear ringback tone until
• You hear dial tone 1.
the system detects your call.
• When it is detected, you hear
the outgoing message if
2. To call an extension, follow the
recorded, or no tone if not
procedure for calling an
recorded.
extension from step 2.
To call an external party, follow
2. Dial the feature number for
the procedure for calling an
selecting a CO line.
external party from step 4.
• You hear dial tone 2.
(Supplement)
3. Dial the DISA user code: four If you dial “* ” while hearing OGM, or hearing no
digits. tone in 10 seconds after OGM is sent, or hearing
dial tone, you are disconnected from the line.

If you dial “* ” during conversation with an


4. Dial the telephone number of the extension, you are not disconnected and able to
external party. continue the conversation.

5. When the external party


answers, start conversation (CO-
CO conversation).

(Supplement)
If account code entry is forced for the accessed
line by programming, you must dial the account
code in step 4 before the telephone number.

3-D-6
(E)
2.03 Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
Description Conditions
Incoming calls can be put through directly to A subscriber number received from the Central
extensions in accordance with the subscriber Office is converted into a DN or FDN according
numbers sent from the Central Office. to the DID Digit Modification Table setting as
Not only extensions but either an Attendant follows.
Console or UCD group may serve as the
destination of the incoming calls via DID lines. <Example>
“Special Attended-DID” Table settings
for U.S.A. and Canada Receive Digit: 4
Available for receiving incoming calls only. DID Delete Digit: 2
lines cannot be used for making outside calls. Insert Dial No.: 2
DID card (KX-T96182) and T-1 Digital Trunk card Subscriber number received from the Central
(DID channel) are provided for this usage. Office: 43112

for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada Processing


(Both-way DID service) <1> The “2” in 43112 is ignored since there are
In some areas, DID lines can be used for both four receive digits. This leaves 4311.
receiving incoming calls and making outside <2> “43” is deleted since there are two delete
calls. One of the following three cards is required digits. This leaves 11. Note that the digits
to utilize Both-way DID service. are deleted from the beginning of the
number.
• Both-way DID card (KX-T96182D) <3> Inserting Dial No. “2” makes the final
(Refer to Reference Guide for KX-T96182D). number 211 which serves as the DN or
• MFC DID card (KX-T96182CE) (Refer to FDN. Note that digits are inserted before
Reference Guide for KX-T96182CE.) the beginning of the number.
• E-1 DIGITAL TRUNK CARD (KX-T96188)
(Refer to Section 3-F-16.00 “E-1 Carrier”.) Reorder tone is sent to the DID caller if the
number of digits received is less than the number
Programming programmed in “Special Attended-DID”, Receive
Reference Digit.
System Programming
VT Dumb
The subscriber number received from the Central
“Group-Trunk Group”,
Office is converted into a DN or FDN. If it could
Type 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
DID Digit Modification Table 9-E-1.02 10-C-15.00 not be put through to the incoming call
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00 destination, because the DN or FDN does not
Trunk Group exist or the destination is Out of Service, the call
DID Start Arrangement is sent to the destination specified by the “Group-
“Special Attended-DID”, 9-K-2.00 10-C-43.00 Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing (Day/Night). If
Receive Digit there is nothing programmed for intercept routing
Delete Digit then the call is sent to Operator 1.*
Insert Dial No.
To make use of DID trunks, program “Group- * If MFC signaling is utilized, reorder tone is sent
Trunk Group”, Type to DID, and assign the CO to the caller in this case.
lines to be used for DID by programming the
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group option. Set the When the CO Forward Mode function has been
DID Start Arrangement in “Trunk-CO Line” and programmed in “System-Class of Service” for
the DID Digit Modification Table in “Group-Trunk the DID incoming call destination, forwarding will
Group (2/2)”. This table is used to convert the not take place, and the call will be put through to
subscriber numbers sent from the Central Office the extension.
into DNs or Floating Directory Numbers (FDN).
The number of “received digits”, “digits to be
deleted” and “the digits to insert” are
programmed in the “Special Attended-DID”
screen. 3-D-7
(70695)
2.04 Trunk Answer From Any Station
(TAFAS)-Day Service
Description Conditions
Incoming CO calls programmed for TAFAS will If tenant service is employed :
ring the external pager and any extension user in The affiliation of each external pager is
the system can answer the calls by dialing the determined by the system programming in
feature number for “Night Answer 1” (when a call “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-
is ringing at external pager 1) or “Night Answer 2” Tenant.
(when a call is ringing at external pager 2). Extension users cannot answer the TAFAS call
ringing at an external pager in the different
To activate this feature, assign “Group-Trunk tenant.
Group”, Incoming Mode (Day) to TAFAS 1 or
TAFAS 2, and “Trunk-CO Line” Trunk Group to “1
to 16” (Trunk Group Number whose Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned as TAFAS 1 or 2).
To utilize the external pager, assign “System-
Operation”, External Paging 1, 2” to “Yes.”

Up to two external pagers can be connected to


this system. TAFAS 1 is associated with external
pager 1 and TAFAS 2 is associated with external
pager 2.

Call handling in TAFAS is identical to UNA. The


difference is that TAFAS is available in day mode
and UNA is available in night mode.
For further information about UNA, refer to
Section 4-I-1.01 “Universal Night Answer (UNA).”

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00


External Paging 1, 2
“System-Numbering Plan (3/9)”, 9-D-6.03 10-C-10.00
Night Answer 1
Night Answer 2
“Group-Trunk-Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Incoming Mode (Day)
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Trunk Group
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-19.00
External Pager-Tenant

3-D-8
2.05 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
General

Description UP to 32 UCD groups can be set up in the


Calls to a UCD group are distributed uniformly system and they can be categorized into the
among the group members so that each member following two types.
can share the same load.
1. UCD group with OGM (01-04)
This UCD feature is particularly helpful when –Section 2.06-1
certain extension receives a high volume of calls 2. UCD group without OGM (05-32)
compared with other extensions. –Section 2.06-2

(Example) Detailed information is described in the Section


3-D-2.06.
DIL 1:1 Switching system

CO 1 Extension A
CO 2 Extension B
CO 3 Extension C

Calls from CO 1 always arrive at Extension A.


Calls from CO 2 always arrive at Extension B.
Calls from CO 3 always arrive at Extension C.
UCD Switching system

CO 1 Extension A
CO 2 UCD Extension B
Group
CO 3 Extension C

Calls to a UCD group hunt for an idle station in a


circular way, starting at the extension following
the last one called.
Call completion time is minimized without
attendant assistance.

The UCD group is comprised of one or more


pickup groups in the same Intercom group.
An extension can be in only one UCD group.
Members can leave the group temporarily, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension
(Logout).

3-D-9
(40993)
An outline sketch of UCD is shown below. (2)When the 1st call arrives at extension A, the
2nd call arrives at extension B.
(1)When a number of calls have been arrived at
a UCD group, the 1st call arrives at extension
A first. 4th call
is in the queue
Calls have arrived at a UCD group 3rd call
is in the queue
2nd call
is in the queue
4th call
is in the queue UCD group
3rd call
is in the queue Extension B
2nd call
is in the queue (When extension B is busy
1st call or in UCD logout mode, the
is in the queue call arrives at extension C.)

UCD group Extension C

Extension A
Extension D

(When extension A is busy*1


or in UCD logout*2 mode, the Extension A
call arrives at extension B.)

Extension B
(3)When the 2nd call arrives at extension C,
(When extension B is busy the 3rd call will arrive at extension D.
or in UCD logout mode, the
call arrives at extension C.) (4)When the 3rd call arrives at extension D,
the 4th call will arrive at extension A.

Extension C [Note]
*1 Busy status
(When extension C is busy
or in UCD logout mode, the • When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call
call arrives at extension D.) Forwarding” has been set to the extension.
• When any one of PDN is used.
Extension D (Including using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension)

(When extension D is busy • When the extension is off-hook.


or in UCD logout mode, the *2 Logout
call arrives at extension A.)
Members can leave the group temporarily, to
prevent calls being sent to their extension.

3-D-10
(40993)
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
with/without OGM
2.06-1 UCD Group with OGM (01-04)
Description If all group members are not available to answer
a call (All Logout)
UCD Groups 01-04 are provided exclusively for
receiving outside calls. A call will be redirected to another destination
(Overflow destination) immediately.
CO

DIL 1:1
DISA
DID
TIE UCD (01)

T336 System

(All busy) (All logout)

ATT/Ext.

Transfer UCD Timetable Overflow


destination (OFDN)

Ext.100
ATT Any UCD EXT.
Group
(only one for each group)
Ext.103 Ext.101

Programming

Ext.102 Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

UCD group (01-04) “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Incoming Mode (Day)
-DIL 1:1
Incoming Mode (Night)
If all group members are busy -Day Mode
A caller may receive an answer delay “Group-Call Pickup Group”, UCD 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
announcement (OGM 1,2) and be placed in the “Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Direct Termination-DN
waiting queue until any one of busy group
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
member goes on-hook, or be redirected to Pickup Group
another destination (Overflow destination), or “Special Attended-DISA”, 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00
receive any other treatments. For Use
A type of treatments may differ depending on the “Special Attended-UCD (1/2)”, 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00
preprogrammed UCD Timetable. 01 to 04
“Special Attended-UCD (2/2)” 9-K-3.02 10-C-45.00
“UCD Auto Log-out Operation — 10-C-70.00
(ULO)”

3-D-11
(70695)
Conditions
1. Calls which can arrive at a UCD group (with What if all members are logged-out?
OGM) are:
Then depending on your software version, the
• Incoming outside calls via DIL(1:1) for which
call is handled as follows.
destination is set as FDN of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DID or TIE by (Software version 8. XX or higher)
dialing FDN of a UCD group The call overflows to the overflow destination
• Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing immediately after the Auto-Logout.
FDN of a UCD group This is changed from 6.XX versions.
• Incoming outside calls transferred by an
(Software version 6.XX or higher)
attendant console or extension
The call is put in the waiting queue. but
continues to hear ringback tone.
2. Login and Logout
There is no timetable treatment.
Members can leave the group temporarily
when they will be away from their desks, to 5. Overflow destination
prevent calls being sent to their extension.
One of the following three destinations can be
(Logout). They can return to the group when
assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)
they are ready to answer a call (Login).
per UCD group (01-04).
Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call
Distribution (UCD)-Log Out” for more • Attendant Console
information on Login and Logout. • Extension
3. Busy status • Another UCD Group (01-04), (05-32)
• When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call (Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow
Forwarding” has been set to the extension. destination (OFDN))
• When any one of PDN has been used. (1) What if the overflow destination is busy?
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at
another extension) The call is put in the waiting queue, and will
begin to ring at the overflow destination as
• When the extension is off-hook. soon as it becomes idle.

4. Auto Log-out or

When a group member does not answer a call The call may begin to ring at a group
more than a set time period (“Call Forwarding- member's extension, if it becomes idle while
No Answer Time-Out”), the call will be overflow destination is still busy.
automatically transferred to other member's
extension. If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs
twice in succession on the same extension, it No
The call is put in Is overflow
automatically set to log-out status. the waiting queue. destination idle?

Note:
From software version 15.XX or higher, “Auto
The call begins to Yes
Log-out” can be disabled on a UCD Group ring at a group
basis. See Section 10-C-70.00 “UCD Auto member's extension.
Log-out Operation (ULO)”.

The call begins to


ring at overflow
destination.

3-D-12
(70695)
(2) What if a call ringing at overflow destination 7. UCD Timetable
(ATT/EXT.) is not answered?
When all extensions in a UCD group are busy,
CO calls are handled according to the pre-
programmed timetable.

UCD group (01-04) The timetable is assigned to the system by


employing “UCD Time Table-UCD (2/2)” in
(All Logout) system programming.

(1) Number of timetables


Overflow destination (ATT/EXT.) Each UCD group (01 to 04) has own timetable
respectively.
(No answer)
(2) Up to 16 steps can be registered per timetable
by selecting a command listed below.

(A) (B) Command list and functions


The call The call will be disconnected
continues to ring. 60 seconds later. Command Functions

1T Callers are put in the waiting queue


(A) A call which comes in directly on the overflow for 15 seconds.
destination*1 continues to ring on it. 2T Callers are put in the waiting queue
(B) A call which comes in on the overflow for 30 seconds.
3T Callers are put in the waiting queue
destination after being answered or held
for 45 seconds.
once by the system*2 will be disconnected
4T Callers are put in the waiting queue
automatically, if not answered by the overflow
for 60 seconds.
destination within 60 seconds.
O1W When OGM1 is in use, wait until
*1 A call via DIL 1:1, DID. OGM1 becomes available and then
OGM1 is sent to the caller.
*2 A call via DISA, transferred by ATT or O2W When OGM2 is in use, wait until
Extension, or a call held by the system as a OGM2 becomes available and then
treatment of the UCD Time Table. OGM2 is sent to the caller.
O1S OGM1 is sent to the caller if
6. OGM1 and OGM2 available.
When OGM1 is in use, skips to the
To utilize OGM, install Direct Inward System next step without sending OGM1.
Access (DISA) card to the system and assign O2S OGM2 is sent to the caller if
the usage of DISA card to OGM1 and/or available.
OGM2 by system programming in advance. When OGM2 is in use, skips to the
The Operator 1 can record OGM. next step without sending OGM2.
Up to four DISA cards can be installed to the H Music-on-Hold is sent to the caller.
system. TR Transfers a call to the overflow
Four OGMs per DISA card can be sent to destination set by “OFDN” of
outside callers simultaneously. “Special Attended-UCD(1/2)” in
Refer to Section 3-F-4.00, 4-I-13.00 and system programming.
6-J-6.00 “Outgoing Message (OGM) OFF Disconnects the outside call.
Recording and Playing Back,” for further RET Returns to the first column.
information.
Note: Any command after “TR” or “OFF” does not
function.

3-D-13
(50195)
(3) Music on Hold is sent to the caller in the Timetable operation examples
queue until a group member answers it.
(Example 1) O1S → 4T → 2T → O2S → TR
(Example)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
In the following case, Music on Hold is sent to
the caller, during 4T (60 seconds) interval.

O1W → 4T UCD Group


Sends Music on Hold
(1)The caller hears OGM1, if available.
(Example)

Sorry, all lines are busy.


Please wait a moment

• What if OGM1 is busy?


Steps (1) and (2) will be skipped.
The caller hears OGM2, if
available (Go to Step 3).
If “O1W” is used instead of “O1S,”
the caller first hears ringback tone
and then will hear OGM1 as soon
as it becomes available (Go to
Step 2).

• What if OGM1 is Out of Service?


Steps (1), (2) and (3) will be
skipped. The caller is directly
transferred to the Overflow
destination (Go to Step 4).

(2)The caller hears Music on Hold for


90 seconds (4T + 2T).

(3)The caller hears OGM2.


(Example)

Sorry, all lines are still busy.


Calling the Operator.

(4)The caller is transferred to the


Overflow destination (Operator or
covering extension).

Note:
• During steps (1) through (3), the
caller will be connected to a UCD
group member as soon as
anyone of members becomes
available to answer the call.

3-D-14
(40993)
(Example 2) O1S → H → 4T → 2T → O2S → H Note:
→ TR
• If “IT” command is used instead of
If “H” command is used as shown “H,” the caller hears ringback tone
above, Music on Hold is always instead of Music on Hold.
sent to the caller whether OGMs (Example 5) H → O1S → TR
are In Service or not. (1) (2) (3)
(Example 3) O1S → 2T → O2W → OFF
(1) (2) (3) (4)
UCD Group

(1)This step is skipped automatically.


UCD Group
“H” does not function.
(1)The caller hears OGM1.
(2)The caller hears OGM1 followed by
(Example) Music on Hold.

Sorry, all lines are busy. (3)The caller is transferred to the


Please wait a moment. Overflow destination.
If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,
(Example 6) → O1S → 2T → O2W → 2T → RET
this step will be skipped.
Then the caller hears ringback tone.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
(2)The caller hears Music on Hold for
30 seconds (2T). (1)The caller hears OGM1.
(Example)
(3)The caller hears OGM2.
(Example) Sorry, all lines are busy.
Please wait a moment.
Sorry, all lines are still busy.
Please call us again. If OGM1 is busy or Out of Service,
Thank you for calling. this step will be skipped.
Then the caller hears ringback tone.
If OGM2 is busy, the caller first
hears ringback tone and then will (2)The caller hears Music on Hold for
hear OGM2 as soon as it becomes 30 seconds (2T).
available.
(3)The caller hears OGM2.
(4)The caller is disconnected from the (Example)
switch.
Sorry, all lines are still busy.
(Example 4) H → TR Please wait a moment.
(1)
If OGM2 is busy, the caller first hears
ringback tone and then will hear
OGM2 as soon as it becomes
UCD Group available.

(1)The caller hears Music on Hold until (4)Same as the step (2).
anyone of the group members or
Overflow destination becomes idle. (5)Go back to the step (1).

3-D-14-1
(50195)
2.06 Uniform Call Distribution (UCD)-
with/without OGM

2.06-2 UCD Group without OGM (05-32)


Description If all group members are not available to answer
a call (All Logout)
UCD Groups (05-32) are provided to receive both
extension and outside calls. A call will be redirected to another destination
(Overflow destination) immediately.
CO

DIL 1:1
DISA
DID UCD (05)
TIE
T336 System

(All busy) (All logout)

ATT/Ext. Ext. ATT/Ext.

Transfer waiting queue

Overflow timeout (OT)

Ext.110 UCD (05)

Overflow destination (OFDN)


Ext.113 Ext.111

Ext.112
ATT UCD (08) EXT.

UCD group (05-32)


Programming
Reference
If all group members are busy System Programming
VT Dumb
A call is placed in the waiting queue and the
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)” 9-E-101 10-C-14.00
caller hears ringback tone. Incoming Mode (Day)
A call in the queue will be redirected to another -DIL 1:1
destination (Overflow destination) if all group Incoming Mode (Night)
members are still busy after a specified time -Day Mode
period (Overflow Timer – OT) has elapsed. “Group-Call Pickup Group”, UCD 9-E-3.00 10-C-17.00
“Trunk-CO Line”, 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
Direct Termination-DN
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Pickup Group
“Special Attended-UCD (1/2)” 9-K-3.01 10-C-44.00
05 to 32
“UCD Auto Log-out operation — 10-C-70.00
(ULO)”

3-D-14-2
(70695)
Conditions
1. Calls which can arrive at UCD group (05-32) 4. Overflow destination
are: One of the following three destinations can be
(1) Outside calls assigned as the overflow destination (OFDN)
per UCD group (05-32)
• Incoming outside calls via DIL (1:1) for
which call destination is set as FDN of a • Attendant Console
UCD group • Extension
• Another UCD Group (05-32)*
• Incoming outside calls via DID by dialing
FDN of a UCD group * UCD group (01-04) is not available to set as
the overflow destination of a UCD group
• Incoming outside calls via DISA by dialing (05-32).
FDN of a UCD group
<LCD display> (Extension user only)
• Incoming outside calls transferred by the
Extension or Attendant Console When a call to a UCD group is transferred and
placed to another UCD group assigned as
(2)Extension calls overflow destination, the display, if provided, of
the caller's PITS shows:
• Calls made by extension or attendant
console by dialing FDN of UCD group → 5678: UCD GRP 08

• Calls transferred by extension or attendant (Treatment of the calls transferred to the overflow
console by dialing FDN of UCD group. destination (OFDN))
2. Login and Logout (1) What if the overflow destination is busy?
Members can leave the group temporarily The call is put in the waiting queue, and will
when they will be away from their desks, to begin to ring at the overflow destination as
prevent calls being sent to their extension. soon as it becomes idle.
(Logout) or
They can return to the group when they are
ready to answer a call. (Login) The call may begin to ring at a group
Refer to Section 4-D-8.00 “Uniform Call member's extension, if it becomes idle while
Distribution (UCD)- Log Out” for more overflow destination is still busy.
information on login and logout.

3. Busy status
The call is put in No Is overflow
• When “Do Not Disturb (DND)” or “Call the waiting queue. destination idle?
Forwarding” has been set to the extension.
• When any one of PDN is used.
(Including using own PDN as an SDN at The call begins to Yes
another extension) ring at a group
member's extension.
• When the extension is off-hook.

<LCD display> (Extension user only) The call begins to


When all extensions within a UCD group are ring at overflow
destination.
busy, the display, if provided, of the caller's PITS
shows:

1234: UCD GRP 12


↓ ↓
FDN UCD group number
3-D-14-3
(40993)
(2) What if a call ringing at overflow destination Operation
is not answered?
Making a call from extension to a UCD group
In case the overflow destination is an
attendant console or extension. 1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
1. When the call ringing at overflow
destination has originally arrived to a UCD
• Dial tone 1 or 3 or 4 sounds.
group by call transfer.
(Transfer Recall) 2. Dial FDN of the UCD group.
The call will ring back at the attendant
console/extension who transferred it, if not
answered until the transfer recall timer has
elapsed.

CO

ATT/EXT.

Transfer

UCD group (05-32)


(All Login)

Overflow destination (ATT/EXT.)

No Answer (Transfer recall timer


has elapsed)

2. When the call ringing at overflow


destination has originally routed via DISA.
<Disconnection>
The call will be disconnected automatically,
if not answered within 60 seconds.

5. Auto Log-out
When an extension in a UCD group does not
answer more than a set time period (“Call
Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out”),the call
will be automatically transferred to other
member's extension.
If “No Answer Time-Out” occurs twice in
succession on the same extension, it is
automatically set to Log-out status.

Note:
From software version 15.XX or higher, “Auto
Log-out” can be disabled on a UCD Group
basis. See Section 10-C-70.00 “UCD Auto
Log-out” Operation (ULO).

3-D-14-4
(70695)
2.07 Private CO (PCO)
Description Conditions
It is possible to connect a CO line as if it were A Private CO button lights up red at the times
connected directly to a DN button on a PITS. below.
This operation is called Private CO (PCO).
1) When the Private CO line is not In Service.
It is then no longer possible to place outgoing
calls from other extensions using this CO line. 2) When the Private CO line has been set to
Also, an incoming call from the CO line assigned CO Busy-Out.
as PCO will arrive only at this PITS.
3) When access using the Trunk Verify
function is made by the Attendant Console.
To program a Private CO line, set “Group-Trunk
Group”, Type to PVL and program the CO line to
A call held on a Private CO button can not be
the Private trunk group in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
retrieved by other extensions, however, an
Group.
incoming call to a Private CO button can be
Also, program the DN button on the PITS to
transferred.
PRV-CO using “Extension-Station (2/3)”, Type
and assign the physical number of the Private
When an incoming CO call arrives, ringing occurs
CO line under Number.
instantly. Delayed ringing is not available.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00


Type
“Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
Type and Number

3-D-15
2.08 Single CO (SCO)
Description CO line which can be assigned as a SCO button
To support prompt handling of outside calls, a CO is:
line can be assigned to a DN button on a PITS • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
telephone. assigned as Bothway or Incoming Only and
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a whose Incoming Mode (Day) is DIL 1: 1, or DIL
PITS serves as the Single CO (SCO) button. 1: N.
SCO button feature provides easy access to the
CO lines for extension users who make and • A CO line which belongs to a trunk group
receive many outside calls. assigned as Outgoing Only.
The PITS telephone user can access a CO line
by simply pressing the SCO button without Programming
dialing the CO line access code, and an incoming
Reference
outside call can be directed to the PITS System Programming
VT Dumb
telephone via dedicated SCO button without
assistance of the Operator. “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
In addition, the associated status LED provides Type and Number
busy/idle status and the busy to idle reminder.

SCO button can be used either one-way service Conditions


(Incoming Only or Outgoing Only) or two-ways
service (Both-Way). • Even if Automatic Route Selection (ARS)
function is set, it is overridden by an outgoing
SCO button can be assigned to a PITS telephone call made by pressing the Single CO button.
in conjunction with DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N feature.
• The Single CO button indicator will light up red
SCO button with DIL 1: 1 feature in the following circumstances.

When DIL 1: 1 feature is employed, SCO button <1> When the Single CO is not In Service
can be assigned to the PITS telephone <2> Idle status and Single CO in Busy Out
programmed as the destination of DIL 1: 1 status
feature.
<3> Idle status and Single CO in trunk route
If SCO button is not assigned on the PITS
control status
telephone, an incoming CO call arrives at a PDN
When the Single CO button is pressed in
button on it.
any of these statuses, its indicator lights up
green but busy tone is heard.
The table below shows the relationship between
the DN button programmed as Single CO and the
In the following cases, the Single CO button
CO line status:
indicator remains lit green and reorder tone is
sent.
Indicator CO Line Status
<1> When Calling Party Control signal has
Off Idle been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Single CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold, <2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
unattended conference outgoing call made from the Single CO.
Green 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: 1)
Lights red Other-use, exclusive hold
Red 60 wink Other-hold
Red 120 wink Privacy release possible
Red 240 wink Incoming call (DIL 1: N)

3-D-16
(30393)
2.09 Group CO (GCO)
Description Trunk group which can be assigned as a GCO
To support efficient utilization of CO lines, a button is:
group of CO lines (trunk group) can be assigned • A trunk group assigned as Bothway or
to a DN button on a PITS telephone. Incoming Only, and whose Incoming Mode
When this function is assigned, a DN button on a (Day) is DIL 1:1 or DIL 1: N.
PITS serves as the Group CO (GCO) button.
GCO button feature provides better service with • A trunk group assigned as Outgoing Only.
a given number of CO lines.
Programming
GCO button can be assigned to a PITS
Reference
telephone in conjunction with DIL 1: N feature. System Programming
VT Dumb
Incoming calls on any CO line in the trunk group
can be directed to a maximum of eight “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
destinations (extension user, ICM group, pickup Type and Number
group) simultaneously.
In this case, incoming calls arrive at GCO buttons
on the PITS telephone. Conditions
If GCO button is not assigned, incoming CO calls
When the ARS function is set, it is overridden by
via DIL 1: N feature arrive at a PDN button on it.
outgoing calls made by the Group CO button.
To make an outside call, a PITS telephone user
Pressing a Group CO button when it is red
can access an idle CO line in the group by simply
serves to set the “Automatic Callback to Trunk”
pressing the dedicated GCO button.
function.
See Section 4-C-6.01, 5-A-4.01 “Automatic
The table below shows the relationship between
Callback-Trunk” for details.
the DN button programmed as Group CO and the
CO line status:
In the following cases, the Group CO button
indicator remains green and reorder tone is sent.
Indicator CO Line Status

Off Free CO line in trunk group and no <1> When Calling Party Control signal has
incoming CO call been detected during a call using the
Lights green I-use Group CO.
Green 60 wink I-hold
<2> When outgoing restriction applies to an
Green 120 wink I-exclusive hold, consultation hold,
unattended conference outgoing call made from a Group CO.
Green 240 wink —
Lights red No idle CO lines in trunk group
and no incoming call in trunk
group
Red 60 wink —
Red 120 wink —
Red 240 wink CO line receiving an incoming call
in trunk group

3-D-17
(30393)
2.10 Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment
Description CO lines of the same trunk group can be assigned to both GCO (as a
group unit) and SCO (as a single unit) at a time.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines.

TG01 CO line 1011


CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

Case 1. Case 2. Case 3.

EXT.100 EXT.100 EXT.100

(Appearance of the call indication in Case 3.)


SCO has priority over GCO when incoming CO calls come.
When an outside call via CO line-1011 comes in on an extension, the
call indication appears on SCO-1011, not on GCO-01.
However it may appear on GCO-01, if SCO-1011 is in use as follows.

(Example)
1. SCO-1011 is in use.
2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.100 via CO line-1011
appears on GCO-01.

1. 2

EXT.100 EXT.100
SCO-1011 is lit GCO-01 is flashing
in green. in red or green.

3-D-17-1
(70695)
Retrieving a call held on GCO from SCO.

Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines and


GCO and SCO buttons are assigned as follows.

TG01 CO line 1011


CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

GCO-01 is in use at EXT.100 now.

EXT.100 EXT.101
GCO-01 is lit in SCO-1011 is lit
green . in red .

In case, CO line 1011 is captured by pressing GCO-01.

When a call on GCO-01 is put on hold at EXT.100, GCO-01 begins to


flash in green and SCO-1011 on EXT.101 begins to flash in red as follows:

EXT.100 EXT.101

EXT.101 can retrieve a call held on GCO-01 by simply pressing the red
flashing SCO-1011.

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00


Type and Number

Conditions None

3-D-17-2
(70695)
2.11 Multiple GCO Assignment
Description More than one GCO button of the same trunk group can be assigned to a
single PITS extension.

(Example)
Assuming that Trunk Group 01 consists of the following CO lines.

TG01 CO line 1011


CO line 1012
CO line 1013
CO line 1014

Case 1.

Ext.100 Ext.101

Case 2.

Ext.100 Ext.101

Case 1 Case 2

Old version Available Not Available

New version Available

Programming Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00


Type and Number

3-D-17-3
(70695)
Conditions (1) Appearance of the call indication in case 2.
If more than one outside call (via CO lines of the same trunk group)
comes in under the following situation, the second call will appear on
the next GCO button of the same extension.

(Example)

CO Lines Direct Termination

Trunk Group 01 CO Line 1011


Ext. 100
CO Line 1012

Incoming Mode (Day): CO Line 1013


DIL 1: 1 Ext. 101
CO Line 1014

1. GCO-01 is in use at Ext.100.


2. Indication of the call which comes in on Ext.100 via a CO line of
Trunk Group 01 appears on another GCO of Ext.100.

1. 2

Ext.100 Ext.100

3-D-17-4
(70695)
3.00 Flexible Ringing Assignment
3.01 Flexible Ringing Assignment- 3.02 Flexible Ringing Assignment -
No Ringing Delayed Ringing
Description Description
Each line access button on the PITS telephone When incoming calls are placed to PITS from
can be programmed to ring or not to ring when extensions, CO lines or doorphones, the
incoming calls arrive during the day or at night. indicators of the PDN, SDN, SCO and GCO
When incoming calls are placed to PITS from buttons corresponding to the respective incoming
extensions, CO lines or doorphones, the calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing
indicators of the PDN, SDN, SCO, GCO and PCO is sent to the phone.
buttons corresponding to the respective incoming It is possible to delay the ringing and have
calls start 240 winking. At the same time, ringing different settings in the day and night mode.
is sent to the phone.
It is possible to disable the ringing and have “Extension-Station”, Day Ring and Night Ring are
different settings in the day and night mode. set to delayed ringing.
The delay time can be set to any one of three
"Extension-Station", Day Ring and Night Ring are values.
set to No Ring.
Delayed 1: 5 seconds after placement of
Programming the incoming call
Reference Delayed 3: 15 seconds after placement of
System Programming the incoming call
VT Dumb
Delayed 6: 30 seconds after placement of
“Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
the incoming call
Day Ring
Night Ring
Programming
Reference
System Programming
Conditions VT Dumb

When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN, “Extension-Station (2/3)”, 9-G-1.02 10-C-24.00
SCO, GCO or PCO button for which no ringing Day Ring
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call Night Ring
flashing in 240 wink. In other words, responding
to incoming calls is not affected by no ringing
assignment in any way. Conditions
When incoming calls are placed to a PDN, SDN,
SCO or GCO button for which delayed ringing
has been set, it is still possible to answer the call
flashing in 240 wink before ringing begins. In
other words, responding to incoming calls is not
affected by delayed ringing assignment in any
way.

3-D-18
4.00 Discriminating Ringing
Description In an SLT, the Held Call Reminder for CO calls is
It is possible to identify the type of an incoming call the same as the CO line incoming ringing
by the ringing pattern. pattern. The ringing for extension hold is the
same as the extension incoming ringing pattern.
The ringing patterns are listed on Section 3-B-
16.00 “Tone and Ringing Patterns.” There is no distinction made for calls to an Off
Premise Extension (OPX): The CO line incoming
Programming ringing pattern only.

None

Conditions
All Transfer Recall signals have the same ringing
pattern as Held Call Reminder.

If there are multiple incoming calls on an extension


when the extension user goes on-hook, the calls
are rung in the following sequence.

<1> Consultation Held Call Reminder


<2> In a PITS, an incoming call from a line in which
the Prime Line Preference (incoming) function
has been set
<3> Call Waiting. The call was waiting when the
user was off-hook.
<4> CO line incoming call, extension incoming call,
intercom incoming call, doorphone incoming
call, Held Call Reminder, Transfer Recall,
Unattended Conference Recall.
When there is more than one of the above
incoming calls in a PITS, the calls are
prioritized in DN sequence (PDN takes top
priority). Intercom incoming calls have the
lowest priority.
<5> Automatic Callback
<6> Timed Reminder

When a multiple number of incoming calls arrive at


a PITS in the on-hook status, priority as to which
calls should be rung is generally on a “first-come
first-served” basis. However, when the Prime Line
Preference (incoming) function has been set, this
line takes precedence.

When there are multiple calls placed to an SLT


which is on-hook, priority as to which calls should
be rung is generally on a “first-come first-served”
basis.

3-D-19
5.00 Station Hunting
5.01 Station Hunting-Circular
Description See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
(UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of
See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call
incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group
Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for
when the called extension is busy. Idle extensions
details on the UCD function.
are automatically hunted in accordance with the
hunting sequence set in the system program, and
The following calls do not receive the Station
the call is put through to an idle extension.
Hunting treatment.
The hunting sequence is set by "Extension- • A call on the ICM button.
Station", Next Hunt Station. • An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1:N
The group formed by this setting is called a or Private CO feature.
hunting group. • A call on the SDN button.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDNs
for the extension and when the extension is Out of When the incoming destination extension is in
Service or in fault condition. any of the following statuses, the operation below
is accomplished.
Circular hunting is enabled when the last DN in the
hunting group sets the first DN as the Next Hunt Status Operation
Station as follows.
Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
FWD setting FWD processing
DN 100 DND setting DND processing

DN 200 Incoming call Depending on the status of the hunted


extensions, the operation below is accomplished
DN 110 : Hunting
after hunting starts.
DN 120 Status Operation

Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller


Hunting Group - Circular
hears ringback tone)
When an incoming call cannot be put through Busy Hunting proceeds to next station
even after hunting all the extensions belonging to FWD setting Hunting proceeds to next station
the hunting group, busy tone is sent to the calling DND setting Hunting proceeds to next station
party.
The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice
Programming Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Reference
System Programming Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
VT Dumb
System (VPS)” for further information.
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Next Hunt Station A call redirected to another PITS extension by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
Conditions on a SCO or GCO button.
Extensions can be in only one hunting group.

Extensions in a UCD group cannot belong to


hunting groups. Similarly, extensions in hunting
groups cannot belong to UCD groups.
3-D-20
(21292)
5.02 Station Hunting-Terminal
Description See Section 3-B-7.03 “Uniform Call Distribution
Station Hunting provides automatic redirection of (UCD) Group” for details on UCD groups.
incoming calls to an idle member of a hunt group See Section 3-D-2.05, 2.06 “Uniform Call
when the called extension is busy. Idle extensions Distribution (UCD)-without OGM/-with OGM” for
are automatically hunted in accordance with the details on the UCD function.
hunting sequence set in the system program, and
the call is put through to an idle extension. The following calls do not receive the Station
Hunting treatment.
The hunting sequence is set by "Extension- • A call on the ICM button.
Station", Next Hunt Station. • An incoming outside call routed via DIL 1:N
The group formed by this setting is called a or Private CO feature.
hunting group. • A call on the SDN button.
Busy status applies when there are no idle PDN's
for the extension and when the extension is Out of When the incoming destination extension is in
Service or in fault condition. any of the following statuses, the operation below
is accomplished instead.
Terminal hunting is selected when the last station
Status Operation
in the hunt leaves the Next Hunt Station blank.
Example Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
FWD setting FWD processing
DN 100 DND setting DND processing

DN 200 Incoming call


Depending on the status of the hunted
DN 110 : Hunting extensions, the operation below is accomplished
after hunting starts.
DN 120
Status Operation
Hunting Group - Circular
Idle PDN Incoming call processed (caller
hears ringback tone)
When an incoming call cannot be put through even Busy Hunting proceeds to next station
after hunting up to the last extension in the hunting FWD setting Hunting proceeds to next station
DND setting Hunting proceeds to next station
group, busy tone is sent to the calling party.

Programming The call forwarded to a busy extension/Voice


Mail Port receives the treatment of the Station
Hunting if programmed.
Reference
System Programming Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
VT Dumb
System (VPS)” for further information.
“Extension-Station (1/3)”, 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
Next Hunt Station A call redirected to another PITS extension by
the Station Hunting feature always rings on a
PDN button on it even if a call is originally routed
Conditions on a SCO or GCO button.
An extension can belong to only one hunting
group.

Extensions belonging to a UCD group cannot


belong to hunting groups. Similarly, extensions
belonging to hunting groups cannot belong to UCD
groups.
3-D-21
(21292)
E. Holding Features

1.00 Music on Hold (for U.S.A. and Canada)

Description Conditions
The external music device (up to two units can be Music on Hold is not sent to the party on Hold
accommodated by this system) automatically unless the settings outlined in description have
sends Music on Hold to a party on Hold. been made.

This function will only be executed when If Tenant Service is employed, the “Trunk-Pager
“System-Operation”, External Music Source 1, 2 & Music Source”, Music Source - Tenant setting
is set to Yes, “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, determines which tenant the external music
Music Source - For Use set either to “HOLD” or device belongs to.
“HOLD & BGM” and the external music device
has been connected. When both external music devices are
accommodated in the same tenant and the
Programming applications of both devices are set identically,
the device connected to port 1 is used as the
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
Music on Hold.
An example of this is given below.
“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
External Music Source 1, 2 <Example>
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
Music Source - For Use Trunk-Pager & Music Source
Music Source - Tenant Port
number Tenant For Use

1 1 HOLD
2 1 HOLD

3-E-1
(60395)
1.00 Music on Hold (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)

Description Programming
System built-in Music Source and/or External System Programming Reference
Music Source (if available) provide(s) Music on VT Dumb
Hold and Background Music. “System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00
Music on Hold is a programmable feature that External Music Source 1, 2
provides music from a music source to a party “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, 9-F-2.00 10-C-20.00
placed on Hold. Music Source - For Use
This lets the waiting party know that he is still Music Source - Tenant
connected.
For further information about Background Music, Conditions
refer to the followings.
Even if tenant service is activated, the built-in
Section 4-I-4.00 “Background Music (BGM)” Music Source cannot be divided between two
tenants.
Section 4-H-2.00 “Background Music (BGM) In this case, both built-in and external music
Section 5-F-2.00 through External Pager” source can be used at a time by the following
Section 6-I-2.00 setting.
<Using system built-in Music Source> 1. Connect External Music Device such as a
1. Set Music Source Selector Switch on the T- radio to EXT MUSIC Jack 2 on the T-SW
SW card to “INT MUS.” Card.
2. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)”, External 2. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)”, External
Music Source 1,2 to “No, Yes.” Music Source 1 to “Yes.”
3. Assign “Trunk Pager & Music Source”,
For Use of Music Source 2 to “Hold” or “Hold & When both external music devices are accommo-
BGM.” dated in the same tenant and the applications of
If you assign “BGM” to For Use, Music on Hold both devices are set identically, the device
is not provided to the party placed on Hold. connected to port 1 is used as the Music on
Hold.
<Using the External Music Device> An example of this setting is given below.
1. Connect External Music Device (such as a
radio) to the system. <Example>
2. Set Music Selector Switch on the T-SW card to
“MUS 2.” Trunk-Pager & Music Source
Port
3. Assign “System-Operation (1/2)” External number Tenant For Use
Music Source 1, 2 to “Yes, Yes.”
4. Assign “Trunk Pager & Music Source”, 1 1 HOLD
For Use of Music Source 2 to “Hold” or “Hold & 2 1 HOLD
BGM.”
If you assign “BGM” to For Use, Music on Hold
is not provided to the party placed on Hold.

When Tenant Service is activated and two


External Music Devices are connected to the
system, the “Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music
Source - Tenant setting determines which tenant
the external music device belongs to.

3-E-1-1 (X)
(60395)
2.00 Held Call Reminder
Description Conditions
When the Hold, Exclusive Hold or Call Park If more than one call is placed on hold at a PITS
(system or station) function has been activated, extension, this function is executed starting with
the party on Hold cannot be kept waiting longer the earliest held call.
than a specific time. A call (when on-hook) or call
waiting tone (when off-hook) is generated to the In a PITS, the CO line and extension Held Call
attendant console or extension as a reminder that Reminder call signals have respectively the
there is a party on Hold. same ringing pattern as the CO line and
The alarm tone sent when the handset is off extension incoming call signals, and a monotone
hook, is heard through the speaker of a PITS and call signal is sent.
through the handset of an SLT. While the Held Call Reminder call signal or call
waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
To execute this function, set “System-Operation”, display, it shows:
Held Call Reminder to “Yes.”
The extension and Attendant times for this Held Reminder
function to be activated are respectively set by
“System-System Timer”, Held Call Reminder and In an SLT, the CO line and extension Held Call
Held Call Reminder (ATT). Reminder call signals are exactly the same as
In order for the call waiting tone to be sent, the the CO line and extension incoming call signals.
feature number for “Call Waiting Set” must be set.

Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation (1/3)”, 9-D-1.01 10-C-4.00


Held Call Reminder
“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
Held Call Reminder
Held Call Reminder (ATT)
“System-Numbering Plan 9-D-6.05 10-C-10.00
(05/11)”,Call Waiting Set

3-E-2
(70695)
3.00 Transfer Recall
Description Conditions
If a call transferred by the Unscreened Call When there are more than one parties on hold,
Transfer, Camp-On Transfer or Ringing Transfer this function is started from the earliest time for
function is not answered by the destination party the transfer operation.
within a preprogrammed time period, the call will
return to the extension user or attendant console In a PITS, the CO line and extension Transfer
that transferred the call. Recall call signals have the same ringing pattern
When the handset is on-hook or off-hook, the as the CO line and extension incoming call
Transfer Recall call signal or call waiting tone, signals, and a monotone call signal is sent.
respectively, enables the party attempting the
transfer to be advised that the call has not been While the Transfer Recall call signal or call
answered. The call waiting tone sent when the waiting tone is being sent, if your PITS has a
handset is off-hook, is heard through the speaker display, it shows:
in the case of a PITS and through the handset in
the case of an SLT. • When the transfer destination extension does
not have a name programmed:
The time taken to activate this function for the
extension or attendant console is set by “System- <Example>
System Timer”, Transfer Recall.
RCL: Ext 1234
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb Extension number (DN)

“System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00 • When the transfer destination extension has a
Transfer Recall name programmed:

<Example>

RCL: Jack

In an SLT, the CO line and extension Transfer


Recall signals are exactly the same as the CO
line and extension incoming call signals.

3-E-3
F. Other Features

1.00 Station Message Detail


Recording (SMDR)
Description SMDR Parameters
When an output device such as the printer Page Length
provided with RS-232C interface etc., is The page length may be selected to position a
connected to the system, it is possible to print out title and data on each page.
the following information. A page length code indicates the number of
lines per page.
• Information about outgoing CO calls A title will be printed on the first three lines of
• Information about incoming CO calls each page.
• Error log data
• Programming data
4 4 lines per page
• Traffic data • •
• •
To execute SMDR, connect the output device to • •
SIO #2 port of RS-232C on the basic shelf (KX- • •
T336100) and set “System-Operation”, SMDR to 99 99 lines per page
“Yes.”
To print out the information about outgoing CO
calls, set “System-Operation”, Outgoing Duration Standard Continuous Paper (11 inches)
Log to “Yes.”
To print out the information about incoming CO
calls, set “System-Operation”, Incoming Duration page
Log to “All Call.” length 66 lines skip
To print out error log data, set “System- (Default) perforation
Operation”, Error Log to “Yes.”
To print out programming data, set “System-
Operation”, Programming to “Yes.” machine
To print out traffic data, set “System-Operation”, perforation
Traffic to “Yes.”

Programming To print data, page length must be longer than


Reference skip perforation by four or more lines.
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Operation”, 9-D-1.02 10-C-4.00 Skip Perforation


SMDR The skip perforation code indicates the number
Page Length (4~99) of lines to be skipped. When the print head
Skip Perf (0~95)
reaches the line designated, the print head
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log moves to the top position of the next page.
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name 0 Print head does not skip. (Default)
Print Secret Dial 1 Print head skips the last line.
Error Log/Programming/Traffic
2 Print head skips the last two lines.
“System-Communication Interface” 9-D-7.00 10-C-11.00
• •
• •
• •
• •
95 Print head skips the last 95 lines.

3-F-1
Typical SMDR Call Detail Report (Information about CO calls)

**********************************************************************
Date Time T CD Sour Dest DN Dial Number Duration Acc code
**********************************************************************
03/24/91 10:03AM 1 E1011 T1017 1011 1234567890123456 00:05’12 1234567890
03/24/91 10:05AM 1 E1012 T1014 1011 4222144 00:01’24

(1) (2) (3)(4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)

(1) Date (start of call) (6) Dest (destination: called party)


03 / 24 / 91 EXXX/EXXXX : extension number
year A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD
day A1/A2 : Attendant Console number
month TXXXX : trunk physical number

(2) Time (start of call) (7) DN (directory number)


10 : 05 AM XXX/XXXX : used directory number
a.m. or p.m. (Blank) : when using CO button
minute
hour (8) Dial Number
(for U.S.A. and Canada)
(3) T (tenant number) Dial Number printout type changes
1 or 2 depending on the setting of “System-
Operation”, Special Carrier Name.
(4) CD (condition code) When it is set to “Dial”:
A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD handling The dialed number sent to the CO line is
A1 : Attendant Console 1 handling printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.
A2 : Attendant Console 2 handling When it is set to “User Name”:
D1 : DISA code 1 The name stored in “Special Carrier
D2 : DISA code 2 Access”, Name is printed out in three
D3 : DISA code 3 letters or marks.
D4 : DISA code 4 When it is set to “Default”:
D5 : DISA code 5 When using Equal Access, “EQ1 to EQ4”
D6 : DISA code 6 is printed out.
D7 : DISA code 7 When using OCC Access, “OC1 to OC4”
D8 : DISA code 8 is printed out.
FW : Call Forwarding to Trunk
RM : Remote Maintenance (for areas other than U.S.A. and Canada)
RA : Remote Alarm The dialed number sent to the CO line is
TR : Transfer printed out at a maximum of 21 digits.
OR : COS Override (Dial transfer,
Walking COS) (9) Duration (duration of call)
00 : 01 ’ 24
(5) Sour (source: calling party) second
EXXX/EXXXX : extension number minute
A0 : DISA, OGM-UCD hour
A1/A2 : Attendant Console number
TXXXX : trunk physical number (10) Acc code (account code)
Account code is printed out at a maximum of
10 digits.

3-F-2
(60395)
2.00 Off Premise Extension 3.00 Walking Station
(OPX)
Description
Description It is possible to move an extension to a new
location without re-programming.
Single line telephones installed off the premise
When moving a telephone, dial the feature
can be operated via a public or private network in
number for “Walking Station Set” at both the
exactly the same way as extension which are on
source and destination telephones.
the premise.
After the move, dial the feature number for
Up to 80 Off Premise Extensions can be installed
“Walking Station Cancel” and the original
per system.
extension number of the moved extension.
Up to two telephones in a system can be moved
The OPX card and OPX Power Unit are required.
simultaneously.
OPX must be set in the “Configuration-Slot
Before executing this function, assign “System-
Assignment.”
Class of Service (1/2)”, Walking Station to “Yes”
for the extension.
Programming
Reference
Programming
System Programming
VT Dumb Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” 9-C-2.00 10-C-2.00
“System-Class of Service (1/2)”, 9-D-4.01 10-C-7.00
Walking Station
Conditions “System-Numbering Plan (07/11)”, 9-D-6.07 10-C-10.00
Walking Station Set
When an incoming call is placed to OPX, ringing Walking Station Cancel
is heard in all the CO line incoming patterns.
A doorphone incoming call cannot be sent to an Conditions
OPX telephone.
It is possible to move a telephone to an extension
which is in the pre-install status. In this case, dial
the feature number for “Walking Station Set” only
at the extension to be moved, and dial the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
original extension number at the destination
extension.
With a PITS, this function is executed from a
PDN.
The telephone type (PITS, SLT, OPX) must be the
same at the source and destination.
If a busy tone is heard when dialing the feature
number for “Walking Station Cancel” and the
extension number, it means that the moving
extension is being used (possibly by another
station with an SDN of the moving station) and
the function cannot be completed. In cases like
this, dial again. If your PITS has a display, it
shows: Try Again
Dialing the feature number for “Walking Station
Cancel” and the extension number at the move
destination in a PITS cannot be done with the SP-
PHONE on.
First lift the handset and then proceed.

3-F-3
(70695)
Operation
Before proceeding with the move, complete steps 6. Replace the handset or press the
1 to 3 at the source and destination extensions. SP-PHONE button.

1. Lift the handset or press the SP-


PHONE button.
(Supplement)
When moving to an extension in the pre-installed
status, follow steps 1 to 3 for the extension
2. Dial the feature number for
before moving it.
“Walking Station Set.”
No settings are required for an extension in the
pre-installed status.
• Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

WST (E xxxx) ON

Extension number

3. Replace the handset or press the


SP-PHONE button.

After the move, complete steps 4 to 6 at the


move destination extension.

4. Lift the handset.

5. First dial the feature number for


“Walking Station Cancel” and
then dial the original extension
number.

• Confirmation tone 1 or 2 is
heard.
• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:

WST (E xxxx) OFF

3-F-4
(50195)
4.00 Outgoing Message (OGM)
Recording and Playing Back
Description Conditions
Up to four types of OGM’s can be recorded by the (1)Tenant Service
Operator 1 (Attendant Console or PITS user) so If tenant service is employed, the affiliation of
that different messages can be used for different each DISA card is determined by the system
situations. programming “Special Attendant-DISA” tenant.
The Operator 1 of each tenant can record and
The following four types of OGM can be recorded play back the OGM within the same tenant.
respectively:
DISA, OGM1, OGM2 and W-UP (Wake-up) (2) Recording of OGM
• OGM recording is executed by selecting an
OGM for outside parties OGM type (usage of DISA card) from the
OGM for DISA is played to the outside party who following four types:
called the system via DISA feature. 1. OGM1 for UCD with OGM
(See Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System 2. OGM2 for UCD with OGM
Access (DISA).”) 3. OGM for DISA
4. OGM for W-UP (Wake-up call)
OGM for OGM1 and OGM2 are played to the
outside party in conjunction with UCD feature. • If the type of multiple DISA cards are the
(See Section 3-D-2.06 “Uniform Call Distribution same in a tenant, the same message is
(UCD)-with OGM.”) recorded for them at a time.

OGM for extension users (3)Playing back of OGM


OGM for W-UP (Wake-up) can be used as a wake- • The following two ways are available:
up message for the extension user.
(See Section 3-F-13.00 “Timed Reminder with A. By selecting an OGM type
OGM (Wake-up Call).”) B. By designating the logical number of
each DISA card directly.
Each OGM can be up to 30 seconds long.
• If there are multiple DISA cards of the same
A DISA card is required to record OGM and up to type in the system or a tenant and the OGM
four DISA cards can be installed to the system. type is selected to play back, playback starts
from the lowest DISA card physical number.
Usage of each DISA card is determined by the
system programming. (4)Others
(See Section 9-K-1.00 “Special Attended-DISA.”) Call Waiting tone and so on are prohibited
during OGM recording and playing.
Programming
Reference
System Programming
VT Dumb

“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00


OGM Record
OGM Playback
“Special Attended-DISA”, For Use 9-K-1.00 10-C-40.00

3-F-5
(70695)
Operation
Recording OGM from PITS (For Operation from • If your PITS has a display, it
Attendant Console, refer to Section 6-J-8.00 shows:
“Outgoing Message (OGM) Recording and Playing
Back.”) xxxxxxxx Play : 00
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button. Indicates playback
time, counts up by
• You hear dial tone 1 or 3 or 4. second.
UCD-OGM1 or
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
UCD-OGM2 or
Record “791” (default) and the
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM
resource number (1 to 4) in
succession.
• When playback is finished, the
MEMORY indicator goes out.
(Resource number)
You hear confirmation tone 3,
1 : OGM1 for UCD
then no tone.
2 : OGM2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
5. Replace the handset or press the
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)
SP-PHONE button.
• The MEMORY indicator flashes
in red 60 wink, confirmation tone
3 is heard. (Supplement)
In step 3 if 30 seconds is over, recording is
• If your PITS has a display, it
terminated and playback starts automatically.
shows:
Accordingly, it is not necessary to execute step 4
afterward.
xxxxxxxx Rec. : 00
In step 3 if you wish to change the message
Indicates recording during recording, you can start recording again
time, counts up by by dialing “* .”
second.
UCD-OGM1 or In step 4 if you wish to interrupt and finish
UCD-OGM2 or playback, press the MEMORY button.
DISA-OGM or Wkup-OGM

3. Begin your message.

4. As soon as you finish, press the


MEMORY button.

• The MEMORY indicator lights in


red.

• After confirmation tone 3


sounds, the recorded message
is played back automatically.

3-F-6
(40993)
Playing back OGM (Supplement)
1. Lift the handset or press the SP- In step 2 if you wish to interrupt and finish
PHONE button. playback, press the MEMORY button.

During playback you can start playback again


from the beginning by dialing “* .”
2. Dial the feature number for OGM
Playback “792” (default) and a
number below in succession.

(Resource number)
1 : OGM1 for UCD
2 : OGM 2 for UCD
3 : OGM for DISA
4 : OGM for W-UP (Wake-up)

(“* ” and DISA No.)


* 1: selects card 1
* 2: selects card 2
* 3: selects card 3
* 4: selects card 4

• The MEMORY indicator lights in


red.
You hear confirmation tone 3,
then the message.

• If your PITS has a display, it


shows:

<Example>
DISA-OGM Play: 00

• When playback is finished, you


hear confirmation tone 3, then
no tone.

• The MEMORY indicator goes


out.

3. Replace the handset or press the


SP-PHONE button.

3-F-7
(40993)
5.00 Intercept Routing-No
Answer (IRNA)
Description Programming
If an incoming outside call directed to a single Reference
System Programming
extension is not answered in a specified time VT Dumb
period, it can be redirected to another destination
“Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
in the system. Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
Another destination can be: “System-System Timer”, 9-D-3.00 10-C-6.00
• An Attendant Console Intercept Routing Time-Out
• An extension user (System)
• A Voice Mail extension Intercept Routing Time-Out
(DISA)
For further information about IRNA and a Voice
Mail extension, refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice
Conditions
Processing System (VPS).”
Intercept Routing-No Answer works for the
This feature also applies to the following calls. following incoming CO calls.

• When an incoming outside call rings back at the 1. All incoming CO calls other than calls
extension who once put the call on hold, is not placed on DIL1 : N, Private CO, Attendant
answered in a specified time period. (Held Consoles, Remote and UCD
Reminder Call) 2. Transfer Recall calls (except those to
Attendant Consoles)
• When an incoming outside call rings back at the 3. Held Call Reminder calls (except those to
extension who once transferred the call to Attendant Consoles, calls on Exclusive
another extension, is not answered in a Hold, calls on hold on Private CO lines)
specified time period. (Transfer Recall) 4. An incoming outside call via DISA/DID
which comes in on an extension in the DND
The destination of Intercept Routing during day mode.
and night are assigned in “Group-Trunk Group”,
Intercept Routing (Day) and Intercept Routing Call Forwarding or Do Not Disturb feature
(Night) on a trunk group basis. assigned on the IRNA destination does not work
on the call which has been transferred to it by the
Set the duration to start Intercept Routing in IRNA feature.
“System-System Timer”, Intercept Routing Time-
Out (System). If the IRNA destination is not currently available to
answer the call transferred by the IRNA feature,
The duration to start Intercept Routing for DISA the call may receive the treatment of the Station
calls follows the setting in “System-System Timer”, Hunting feature.
Intercept Routing Time-Out (DISA).
For details about DISA, refer to Section 3-D-2.02 If the destination extension of a direct incoming
“Direct Inward System Access (DISA).” outside call is in the data line security mode,
IRNA feature does not work on it.
Refer to Section 4-I-6.00 “Data Line Security” for
further information.

If the destination is a PITS with display, it shows:


<Example>
CO: PANASONIC

3-F-8
(30393)
6.00 Rerouting
Description Programming
If an incoming outside call cannot be placed Reference
System Programming
anywhere, the call can be routed to another VT Dumb
destination. This is called Rerouting. “Group-Trunk Group (1/2)”, 9-E-1.01 10-C-14.00
Rerouting will take place in the following cases. Intercept Routing (Day)
Intercept Routing (Night)
1. If the system cannot determine the
destination to place the call (for example,
no destination is assigned). Conditions
2. If the system determines the destination but If a call is rerouted to an extension user and the
the destination cannot currently receive the user's PITS has a display, it shows:
call (for example, it is not “In Service”).
3. If a call arrives at a trunk which is set to <Example>
“Outgoing Only.”
CO : PANASONIC
If a call is rerouted, the call will be sent to the
following destinations: Indicates the name of the CO line.

1. If “Group-Trunk Group”, Intercept Routing


(Day/Night) is assigned, the call is sent to
the assigned destination.*
2. If it is not assigned, the call is sent to
Operator 1 in the receiving tenant.

* If the assigned destination is a Voice Mail


extension, the call is not sent to it.
Refer to Section 3-F-10.00 “Voice Processing
System (VPS)” for further information.

3-F-9
(21292)
7.00 Calling Party Control (CPC)
Signal Detection
Description Programming
CPC (Calling Party Control) signal is the on-hook Reference
System Programming
indication (disconnect signal) sent through the CO VT Dumb
line when either calling or called party goes on- “Trunk-CO Line”, CPC Detection 9-F-1.00 10-C-18.00
hook. “CPC Signal Detect Timing- — 10-C-49.00
To support efficient utilization of the CO lines, the Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)”
system monitors the status of the CO lines, and
when CPC signal is detected, the system
disconnects the CO lines connected compulsorily. Conditions
In default mode, CPC signal detection works on Some switching system of the central office may
incoming CO calls, and does not work on outgoing send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence and the
CO calls (except once they are placed on hold or attempt of making a call may be terminated.
consultation hold). If your switching system does not send CPC-like
In this case, if the extension user remains off-hook signal in dialing sequence, we recommend to
after the completion of an outgoing CO call, the make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO
system does not release all the switches used to calls.
establish the connection, and a CO line connected
will continue to be seized by the extension user CPC signal detection can be assigned to
ineffectively. incoming CO calls only or both on incoming and
outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is
To prevent the extension users from such invalid assigned to outgoing CO calls only, it does not
seizure of CO lines, it is administrable to make function.
CPC signal detection effect on outgoing CO calls
by using CPC command at dumb programming
mode.
This feature is assignable on a CO line basis.
Refer to Section 10-C-49.00 “CPC Detect Timing-
Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)” for further information.

3-F-10
8.00 CO Busy Out
Description Operation
Allows the operator 1 (extension user or attendant Setting CO Busy Out to a CO line (from operator
console) to busy out the invalid CO lines. 1)
Any user (including the operator at attendant
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
console) cannot seize the busied-out CO lines.
PHONE button.
To busy out the invalid CO line, dial the feature
number for “Busy Out Trunk” and trunk port
• You hear dial tone.
physical number of the associated CO line.
To return the busied-out CO line to service, dial the
2. Dial the feature number for “Busy
feature number for “Unbusy Trunk” and trunk-port
Out Trunk” and trunk port physical
physical number of the associated CO line.
number.
It is assignable to busy out the invalid CO lines
• You hear confirmation tone.
automatically by using ABC command at dumb
• If your PITS has a display, it
programming mode.
shows:
Refer to Section 10-C-50.00 “Automatic Busy-Out
Count (ABC)” for further information. Busy Out: T xxxx
For CO Busy Out from Attendant Console, refer to
Section 6-J-10.00 “CO Access Control.”
Trunk port physical
number
Programming
Reference
3. Replace the handset or press the
System Programming
VT Dumb SP-PHONE button.

“System-Numbering Plan (09/11)”, 9-D-6.09 10-C-10.00


Busy Out Trunk
Unbusy Trunk
“Automatic Busy-Out Count — 10-C-50.00 Canceling CO Busy Out (from operator 1)
(ABC)”
1. Lift the handset or press the SP-
PHONE button.
Conditions
None • You hear dial tone.

2. Dial the feature number for


“Unbusy Trunk” and trunk port
physical number.

• You hear confirmation tone.


• If your PITS has a display, it
shows:
Unbusy: T xxxx

Trunk port physical


number
3. Replace the handset or press the
SP-PHONE button.

3-F-11
(70695)
9.00 Parallel Connection of
Extensions
Description Programming
Any Single Line Telephone can be connected Reference
System Programming
parallely with a PITS telephone. VT Dumb
When parallel connection is made, an extension “Extension Station” 9-G-1.01 10-C-22.00
user can make and answer a call by using either of Parallel Connect
both telephones.

However, the operation of parallely connected Conditions


Single Line Telephone is somewhat restricted as
Not only a Single Line Telephone but an
follows:
answering machine, a facsimile, or a modem
Features not available are: (personal computer) can be connected parallely
• External Feature Access with certain PITS telephones.
• Conference
• Pickup Dialing The parallel connection of a Single Line
• Account Code Entry Telephone and a PITS telephone becomes
available under the following conditions.
Cannot make a call when parallely connected PITS
telephone is: — Parallely connected PITS telephones are
• In the BGM mode interfaced with HLC card.
• Being paged through built-in speaker — The number of Single Line Telephones which
• In the PITS programming mode can be connected parallely with PITS
telephones must be within 48 lines per shelf.
Will not ring if parallely connected PITS telephone
is:
• In the Intercom Automatic Answer mode
• In the Voice Alerting mode

To make parallel connection effective, assign


“Extension-Station,” Parallel Connect to “Yes” at
parallely connected PITS telephone side.

3-F-12
10.00 Voice Processing System (VPS)
Description
The KX-T336 system provides the following features to enhance the performance of the
Voice Processing System (VPS) — KX-TVP150.
• Voice Mail Integration (Section 3-F-10.01)
• DTMF Tone Integration (Section 3-F-10.02)

Voice Mail Integration


The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension's mailbox.
(Configuration)

Incoming DIL 1:1 DIL 1:1


DIL 1:N Mode DISA DISA
(Day):ATT DID DID

CO CO CO CO

Hunting Hunting
Ext. Ext. Ext. ATT Ext. Ext. VPS
Console FWD (Follow on ID is sent)
Transfer IRNA (Follow on ID is sent)
Transfer
FWD (Follow on ID is sent) VPS VPS
Ext.
FWD (Follow on ID is sent)
Ext.

VPS
Hunting Hunting

3-F-13
(21292)
DTMF Tone Integration
The KX-T336 system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the state of the call (busy, answered,
ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call progress tones.
(Configuration 1)
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

CO

Ext.

Transfer Transfer
Ext. VPS Ext.

✕ Hunting Hunting Hunting

FWD (Follow on ID is sent) *


VPS VPS VPS ✕ VPS

Hunting
✕ Hunting Hunting

Ext. VPS *Available if the Voice Mail


Integration feature is enabled.

(Configuration 2)
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

CO

FWD (Follow on ID is sent) * Transfer


Ext. Ext. VPS Ext.
Busy
Hunting Hunting
Hunting Hunting

VPS VPS VPS ✕ VPS

Hunting Hunting Hunting Hunting

Ext. VPS *Available if the Voice Mail


Integration feature is enabled.

3-F-14
(21292)
10.01 Voice Mail Integration
Description The KX-T336 system can forward callers directly to the called extension's
voice mailbox, if the caller is forwarded to a Voice Mail Port (all calls, busy
or no answer) and this feature is enabled by the extension user.
The KX-T336 system automatically sends the digits of mailbox number of
the called extension with DTMF tones to the Voice Mail Port before
connecting the caller.
These digits are commonly known as the Follow on ID.
A max of 16 extension ports (HLC or SLC card) of the KX-T336 system
can be programmed for connection to the Voice Processing System
KX-TVP150.

This feature applies to the following calls.

Calls transferred by :
• Call Forwarding — All Calls
• Call Forwarding — Busy/Off-hook
• Call Forwarding — No Answer
• Call Forwarding — Busy/No Answer
(including the calls transferred to the extensions on which one of the
above mentioned Call Forwarding feature is assigned.)
• Intercept Routing — No Answer (IRNA)
(including the transfer recalled outside call and held reminder outside
call)

Extensions assigned as Voice Mail Port are not allowed to connect to


each other. For example, an Automated Attendant Port is not allowed to
connect to another Voice Mail Port.

Note this feature can be programmed in Dumb mode only.

Programming
(Dumb programming mode) 1) Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu
screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter P R G and press Return key when Dumb programming


mode initial prompt ( ; > ) is displayed. Then programming mode initial
prompt ( ; PRG > ) is displayed on the screen.

3) Program the required items as follows:

3-F-15
(21292)
Voice Mail Port Assignment:
Input Format PRG>VMD AT Item Number (01-16) CR

Input Value for Item Assigning Items Input Value


Item Number Number
01 Voice Mail DN DNxxxx:Directory Number
• 0: None

16 (Default = 0)

To remove the existing setting, use “$CLR” command.


For further information about programming, refer to Section 10-C-54.00
“Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD).”

Mailbox Number Assignment:


Input Format PRG>MBN AT Index Number CR
Index Number = Physical Number of Extension Port or DN

Input Value for Item Assigning Items Input Value


Item Number Number
None Mailbox Number Up to 10 digits of numeric
characters (0-9), “ ” and “ # ”
(Default = Extension Number)

Mailbox Number specific to each extension (same as the extension


number) is assigned to all extensions by default.

To remove the existing setting, use “$CLR” command.


For further information about programming, refer to Section 10-C-55.00
“Mailbox Number (MBN).”

Conditions
1) Station Hunting Group – Circular

To use the Voice Mail Integration feature efficiently, we recommend to


program a station hunting group among the Voice Mail (VM) Extensions,
this would reduce the possibility of the callers encountering the busy
status.

When “Station Hunting Group – Circular” is programmed among the VM


Extensions, a call transferred to the busy VM Extension (including “Not
INS” status) by Call Forwarding (FWD) or Intercept Routing No Answer
(IRNA) feature will be automatically transferred to an idle VM Extension.

3-F-16
(21292)
2) Call Forwarding and Station Hunting

The KX-T336 system can send the Follow on ID (the digits of mailbox
number of the called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the caller is
forwarded to a Voice Mail Port.
The following simplified flow chart shows the treatment of the call
forwarded to a VM extension.
No
Is FWD destination a VM extension?

Follow on ID is not sent. Yes


No
Is it busy or in “Not INS” status?

Yes
No
Does it have the next hunt station?

Yes
The treatment of the call No Is there any idle VM extension within
depends on the types of a Station Hunting Group?
the Call Forwarding
feature assigned.
(Refer to “5. Treatment Yes
of the call forwarded to
the busy extension/VPS” Callers are forwarded to the called
on page 3-F-46 for extension's mailbox directly.
further information.)

3-F-17
(21292)
3) Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) and Station Hunting
The KX-T336 system can send the Follow on ID (the digits of
mailbox number of the called extension) to the Voice Mail Port, if the
caller is transferred to a Voice Mail Port by IRNA feature.
The following simplified flow chart shows the treatment of the call
which has been transferred to a VM extension by the IRNA feature.

No
Is IRNA destination a VM extension?

Follow on ID is not sent. Yes


No
Is it busy or in “Not INS” status?

Yes
No
Does it have the next hunt station?*

Yes
(Refer to “8. Treatment of No Is there any idle VM extension within
the call transferred to the a Station Hunting Group?
busy extension/VPS” on
page 3-F-51 for further
information.) Yes

Caller are transferred to the called


extension's mailbox directly.

* If a call transferred to a busy VM extension by IRNA feature is “Transfer


recalled call” or “Held Reminder Call,” it will be put on the waiting status
whether the IRNA destination has the next station assignment or not.

3-F-18
(21292)
4) Call Transfer and Voice Mail Integration
Not only an incoming call directed to the extension, but a transferred call
(both screened and unscreened call transfer) is applied to the Voice Mail
Integration feature.
Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension and Transfer Recall
Example
VM.108 (busy) VM.107 (busy) VM.106 (busy)

Hunt Hunt
FWD
Ext.100 Ext.101 Ext.102

Making a Transferring
FWD–All Calls
call a call
to VM.106
1. The Ext.100 makes a call to the Ext.101.
2. The Ext.101 answers the call from the Ext.100. and transfers it to the
Ext.102 (Call Forwarding – All Calls to VM 106 is assigned). Then
replaces the handset.
3. Since FWD destination VM.106 and all other VM extensions in the
Station Hunting Group are busy, the call from Ext.100 is put on the
waiting status.

<Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension>


If VM.106 becomes idle before the transfer recall timer has been elapsed,
the call is connected to the VM.106, and the caller can access the
Mailbox of the Ext.100 automatically.
Camp-on Transfer to a VM extension is only available when “Call
Forwarding–All Calls” is assigned to the Ext.102.
<Transfer Recall>
If VM.106 is still busy after the transfer recall timer has been elapsed, the
call will ring back at Ext.101.
What if Call Forwarding (FWD)-No Answer is assigned on the
extension where a call has been transferred without announcement
(Unscreened Call Transfer) ?
A call is forwarded to the FWD destination after the Call Forwarding No
Answer timer has been expired.
If the FWD destination is busy, the forwarded call will ring back at the
extension who transferred the call.
(Note)
In above case, if the destination of Call Forwarding-No Answer is an
Attendant Console, the transferred call is not forwarded to an Attendant
Console.
The transferred call rings back at the extension who transferred the call
after the Call Forwarding No Answer timer has been expired.
3-F-19
(21292)
5) Others
(a) If the extension to which calls are to be forwarded itself is in a call
forward mode, a call will not be forwarded furthermore and it is
connected to the first forwarded extension.
Example
Ext.100 Ext.101 Ext.102
Not
FWD
An incoming call ×
(Programming) Forward to : Forward to :
Ext.101 Ext.102

An incoming call is forwarded to Ext.101 and connected to it, not


forwarded to Ext.102 furthermore.

(b) If an Operator calls to the extension in a call forward mode by


employing “One time FWD cancel” feature, a call is not forwarded
furthermore and rings on the FWD setting extension.

(c) Conference call

The VM extension can not originate a conference call.

(Example)
During a call with the Party 1 while putting the Party 2 on consultation
hold.
• If an SLT extension (not a VM extension) presses the switchhook, a
conference call among three parties is established.
• In case of a VM extension, it will be connected to the Party 2 and the
Party 1 is disconnected.

Reference Station Hunting — Circular (Section 3-D-5.02)


Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA) (Section 3-F-5.00)
Call Forwarding (FWD) (Section 4-F-2.00, Section 5-D-2.00)
Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD) (Section 10-C-54.00)
Mailbox Number (MBN) (Section 10-C-55.00)

3-F-20
(21292)
10.02 DTMF Tone Integration
Description On extensions with the Voice Mail Port parameter enabled, the KX-T336
system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the sate of the call
(busy, answered, ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call
progress tones. These codes enable the Voice Processing system to
immediately recognize the current state of the call and improve its call
handling performance. These codes apply to all incoming calls: Outside
calls only indicate disconnect (provided the KX-T336 system is
programmed properly for CPC detection and the Central Office sends the
CPC signal).

Programming 1) Press CTRL key and V key simultaneously when Main Menu
screen is displayed at VT programming mode.

2) Enter P R G and press Return key when Dumb programming


mode initial prompt (;>) is displayed. Then programming mode initial
prompt (; PRG>) is displayed on the screen.

3) At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:


; PRG > WS 3 AT 3 (↵ )
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration.............. N
; INPUT >>

4) At the Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:


; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y (↵ )

5) The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) for Item 1 as
follows:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y
; 1 : DIL 1:N CO Key Only ................. N
; INPUT >>

6) To store the new assignment to the system, at Input prompt


(INPUT >>), type:
; PRG > WS 3 AT 3
; 3 : DTMF-Tone Integration............... N
; INPUT >> Y
; 1 : DIL 1:N CO Key Only ................. N
; INPUT >> $ EOD (↵ )

This assigns the DTMF-Tone Integration feature to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG>) appears on the screen again.

3-F-21
(21292)
Conditions The following table describes the DTMF codes, call state and typical
condition where the KX-T336 system would send the code.

Code Call State Typical Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension it


dialed is ringing.

B 1 Busy Tone Sent to the VPS when the extension it


dialed is busy.

B 2 Reorder Tone Sent to the VPS if it dials an invalid


extension number or if it is
inadvertently connected to another
VPS.

B 3 DND Tone Sent to the VPS if the dialed extension


has set DND feature (Do Not Disturb).

A 2 Answer Sent to the VPS when the called


extension answers the call.

C 1 Forwarded to Voice Sent to the VPS if the caller is


Mail (Ringing) forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is available to accept
the call.

C 2 Forwarded to Voice Sent to the VPS if the caller is


Mail (Busy) forwarded to a voice mail port and that
voice mail port is not available to
accept the call.

C 3 Forwarded to Sent to the VPS if the caller is


Extension (Ringing) forwarded to another, non-voice mail,
extension.

D 1 Confirmation Tone Sent to the VPS when it successfully


dials a message waiting lamp on or
message waiting lamp off code.

D D Disconnect Sent to the VPS when the calling party


(Reorder Tone) disconnects.

3-F-22
(21292)
A. Treatment of the call transferred by the VPS
The treatment of the call from a VPS extension varies depending on the
conditions.
The following detailed information explains the treatment of a call from a
VPS extension by the types of the call.

1. Direct Call
1-1. To an extension

Caller

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext. 1

The type of the DTMF tones sent to the VPS depends on the status of the
called extension as follows.

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.1 is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone The Ext.1 is busy.

B 3 DND Tone The Ext.1 is in the DND mode.

A 2 Answer The Ext.1 answers the call.

1-2. To another VPS extension

Caller

VPS 1 ✕
Transfer
VPS 2

A call from a VPS extension does ring on another VPS extension whether
it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Reorder Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected


to the VPS 2

3-F-23
(21292)
2. Station Hunting
2-1. All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions

Caller Ext.4
Hunting Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.3

Hunting Hunting
Ext.2

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting


group is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

2-2. All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions

✕ ✕
Caller VPS 5

VPS 1 ✕
Transfer
VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4

✕ VPS 3

A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Busy Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected


to another VPS.

3-F-24
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
2-3. Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group
A) When the destination is a VPS extension

Caller Ext.2
✕ Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 3

Hunting ✕
Ext.1

A call from a VPS extension does not ring on another VPS extension
whether it is idle or not.

Code Call State Conditions

B 2 Busy Tone The VPS 1 is inadvertently connected


to another VPS.

B) When the destination is a non-VPS extension.

Caller VPS 3 ✕
Hunting

Transfer
VPS 1 Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.2

✕ Hunting
VPS 2

The call hunts for the idle non-VPS extension only.

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.1 or 2 is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone Both Ext.1 and 2 are busy. *

* This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-25
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD)
3-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension

Caller

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2
FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone The Ext.2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it)

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.


(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

The call is still ringing at the
Ext.1.

3-F-26
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD) (continued)
3-2. FWD to a VPS extension

Caller

Transfer Forward
VPS1 Ext.1 VPS 2
FWD mode

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.


(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2.) *1

C 2 Busy Tone *2 The VPS 2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is busy.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-27
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting
4-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Caller Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

Ext.3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone At least one extension of a hunting


group is idle.

B 1 Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one extension


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) of a hunting group is
↓ idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle
extension of a hunting group
and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All extensions of a


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

The call is still ringing at Ext.1.

3-F-28
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4-2. FWD to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)

Caller VPS 5
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone At least one VPS


(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS extension of a hunting
extension and ringing on it.) *1 group is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting


group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone At least one VPS


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) extension of a hunting
↓ group is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle VPS
extension and ringing on it.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
an idle VPS extension and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to an idle VPS extension.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-29
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.3 FWD to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Caller VPS 3
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.2)

C 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but


(The call is forwarded to the the VPS 2 is idle.
VPS 2.) *1

C 3 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 2


(The call is ringing at Ext.3) are busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS
3 are idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a


hunting group are busy.

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-30
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) The VPS 2 is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

A 1 Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 2


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) are busy.

The Ext.3 and the VPS
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
3 are idle.
has been elapsed.

C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-31
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.4 FWD to a VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Caller Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Transfer Forward
VPS 1 Ext.1 VPS 2 Hunting Group VPS 4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 3

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.
(FWD-All/Busy)

Code Call State Conditions

C 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.


(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

C 3 Ringback Tone The VPS 2,3 and 4 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.3) busy.
The Ext.3 is idle.

C 2 Busy Tone *2 All members of a


hunting group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 1 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 2 and ringing on it.) *1

Continued

3-F-32
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
Continued

Code Call State Conditions

A 1 Ringback Tone The VPS 2,3 and 4 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.

The Ext.3 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 3 Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.3 and ringing on it.)

A 1 Ringback Tone All members of a


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

C 2 Ringback Tone *2

*1 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, can release the call to
the VPS 2 and take another incoming call.
The Follow on ID of the Ext.1 is sent to the VPS 2.
*2 This way, the VPS 1, typically an Automated-Attendant, knows it must give the
caller an opportunity to leave a message before releasing the call.

3-F-33
(21292)
B. Treatment of the call placed by the extension or outside party
The treatment of a call from the extension or outside party varies
depending on the conditions of the called extension.
The KX-T336 system does not send codes (DTMF tones).
The following detailed information explains the treatment of a call from
the extension or outside party by the types of the call.

1. Direct Call
1-1. To an extension

Ext./CO Ext.1/VPS 1

The type of call progress tones sent to the caller varies depending on the
status of the called extension/VPS as follows.

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 The Ext.1/VPS 1 is idle.

Busy Tone The Ext.1/VPS 1 is busy.

DND Tone The Ext.1/VPS 1 is in the DND mode. *2

Answer The Ext.1/VPS 1 answers the call.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


If an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 In case of calls via DISA/DID
If a call via DISA/DID is directed to an extension in the DND mode, it will be
automatically redirected to another extension (including VPS extension) or an
attendant console assigned as the IRNA destination.
For further information, refer to Section 4-D-6.00, 5-B-4.00 “Do Not Disturb
(DND).”

3-F-34
(30393)
2. Station Hunting
2-1. All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions

Ext.4
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.3

Hunting Hunting
Ext.2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone * At least one extension of a hunting


group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

* In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

2-2. All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions

VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3

Hunting Hunting
VPS 2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone * At least one VPS extension of a


hunting group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

* The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-35
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
2-3. Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group
A) When the destination is a VPS extension

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 2

Hunting Hunting
Ext.1

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1,*2 At least one extension of a hunting


group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-36
(21292)
2. Station Hunting (continued)
B) When the destination is a non-VPS extension.

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

Ext./CO Ext.1 Hunting Group Ext.2

Hunting Hunting
VPS 1

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1,*2 At least one member of a hunting


group is idle.

Busy Tone All members of a hunting group are


busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

3-F-37
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD)
3-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2
FWD mode
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *2 The Ext.2 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.


(The call is ringing at the Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

The call is still ringing at the
Ext.1. *2

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.


Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-38
(21292)
3. Call Forwarding (FWD) (continued)
3-2. FWD to a VPS extension

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1
FWD mode
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.


(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1.) *1

Busy Tone *2 The VPS 1 is busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
VPS 1.) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is busy.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone *2
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1.)

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.


Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-39
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting
4-1. FWD to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)

Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

Ext.3

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone *1 At least one extension of a hunting


group is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members (including the Ext.1) of a


hunting group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension of


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) a hunting group is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

The call is forwarded to an idle
extension of a hunting group
and ringing on it. *1

Ringback Tone All extensions of a


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) hunting group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

The call is still ringing at Ext.1. *2

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.
3-F-40
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4-2. FWD to a VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)

VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS


(The call is forwarded to an idle extension of a hunting
VPS extension and ringing on it.) *1 group is idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting


group are busy.

(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) extension of a hunting
↓ group is busy.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to an idle
VPS extension and ringing on it.)*1

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone *2
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1.)

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*2 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-41
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
4.3 FWD to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 1

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but the


(The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 is idle.
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.3) *1 busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.

Busy Tone *3 All members of a hunting


group are busy.

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.
*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-42
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.2
and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) The VPS 1 is idle.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
1 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.

The Ext.3 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the Ext.3
and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *3

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

3-F-43
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called
extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

4.4 FWD to a VPS extension


(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

Forward
Ext./CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
FWD mode
Hunting Hunting

VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.
(FWD-All/Busy)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.


(The call is forwarded to the VPS
2 and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1,2 and 3 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.2) *2 busy.
The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone *3 All members of a hunting


group are busy.

3-F-44
(21292)
4. Call Forwarding and Station Hunting (continued)
(FWD-No Answer)

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.1)

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the VPS
1 and ringing on it) *1

Ringback Tone The VPS 1,2 and 3 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) busy.

The Ext.2 is idle.
Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is forwarded to the
Ext.2 and ringing on it.) *2

Ringback Tone All members of a hunting


(The call is ringing at Ext.1) group are busy.

Call Forwarding No Answer Time
has been elapsed.

Ringback Tone
(The call is still ringing at Ext.1) *3

*1 In case of outside calls (DIL 1:1, DISA,DID)


In an incoming outside call is not answered by the extension in a specified time
period (IRNA timer), it will be transferred to another destination. — IRNA
Refer to “6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)” and “7. IRNA and Station
Hunting” on pages 3-F-47 through 3-F-50 for further information.

*2 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*3 The treatment of calls differs depending on the types of calls.
Refer to “5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS” for further
information.

3-F-45
(21292)
5. Treatment of the call forwarded to the busy extension/VPS
The following table shows the treatment of the call forwarded to the busy
extension or VPS (including all members of the Station Hunting Group are
busy) by types of the Call Forwarding feature assigned.
Outside Call
Extension Call
DID DIL 1:1 DISA

The call is put on the waiting status,


and it will be connected to the FWD
destination as soon as it becomes
idle. If the FWD destination is still
busy after the IRNA timer has been
elapsed, a call will be transferred to
the IRNA destination.

Call Forwarding – All Calls: The caller hears busy tone. If the IRNA destination is not
programmed.

The call is put The call will be


on the waiting disconnected
status until the within 60
FWD destination seconds after the
becomes idle. IRNA timer has
been elapsed.

Call Forwarding does not function.

The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be


transferred to the IRNA destination after a
specified time period* has been elapsed.
When the call ringing at The call
Ext.1 is not answered. continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
ring at Ext.1.
The call The call is disconnected within 60
continues seconds after the IRNA timer has
to ring at been elapsed.
Ext.1.

Call Forwarding If Ext.1 is Call Forwarding does not function.


– Busy/Off-hook an SLT or a
– No Answer PITS with The caller hears busy tone.
–Busy/No Answer all PDN
buttons are
in use.

Call Forwarding does not function.


When
Ext.1 is The call continues to ring at Ext.1, and it will be
busy or If Ext.1 is a transferred to the IRNA destination after the IRNA
off-hook. PITS and timer has been elapsed.
one or two The call
PDN continues to If the IRNA destination is not programmed.
buttons on ring on an idle
it are not in The call The call will be disconnected within
PDN of Ext.
use. continues 60 seconds after the IRNA timer
to ring at has been elapsed.
Ext.1.

* Call Forwarding No Answer timer + IRNA timer

3-F-46
(21292)
6. Intercept Routing No Answer (IRNA)
6-1. IRNA to a non-VPS extension

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.

Busy Tone * The Ext.2 is busy.

* Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

6-2. IRNA to a VPS extension


IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1
DIL 1:1
DISA
DID

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The VPS 1 is idle.


(The call is transferred to the
VPS 1.) *1

Busy Tone *2 The VPS 1 is busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-47
(21292)(E)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting
7-1. IRNA to a non-VPS extension
(All members of a hunting group are non-VPS extensions)
Ext.5
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.4
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
Ext.3

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one extension in a hunting group


is idle.

Busy Tone * All members in a hunting group are busy.


* Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

7-2. IRNA to a VPS extension


(All members of a hunting group are VPS extensions)
The call hunts for an idle VPS extension in a hunting group following the
programmed order.
VPS 4
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 2

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone At least one VPS


↓ extension in a hunting
(The call is transferred to an idle group is idle.
VPS extension.) *1

Busy Tone *2 All members in a hunting


group are busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.
*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-48
(21292)(E)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting (continued)
7.3 IRNA to a non-VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

VPS 2
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 Ext.2 Hunting Group Ext.3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 1

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.

Call State Conditions

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is idle.


(The call is ringing at Ext.2)

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 is busy but the


(The call is forwarded to the VPS 1 is idle.
VPS 1 and ringing on it.) *1

Ringback Tone The Ext.2 and VPS 1 are


(The call is ringing at Ext.3) busy.
The Ext.3 and the VPS 2
are idle.

Busy Tone *2 All members of a hunting


group are busy.

*1 The KX-T336 system sends Follow on ID (mailbox number of the called


extension) when a VPS extension answers the call.

*2 Refer to “8. Treatment of the call transferred to the busy extension/VPS by IRNA
feature” for further information.

3-F-49
(21292)
7. IRNA and Station Hunting (continued)
7.4 IRNA to a VPS extension
(Both VPS and non-VPS extensions are members of a hunting group)

Ext.2
Hunting Hunting

IRNA
CO Ext.1 VPS 1 Hunting Group VPS 3
DIL 1:1
DISA Hunting Hunting
DID
VPS 2

The call hunts for both VPS and non-VPS extensions in a hunting group
following the programmed order.